HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook
The Handbook is available on the CITROËN website, in
the "MyCitroën" section or at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
This symbol indicates the latest
information available.
Access to the Handbook.
Then select:
- the vehicle,
- the print edition appropriate for the date of 1
st
registration of your
vehicle.
Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook.
From the appropriate Store, download the Scan
MyCitroën application for smartphone.
Select:
- the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
- the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of 1
st
registration of your vehicle.
Welcome
Thank you for choosing a Citroën
C4 SpaceTourer.
In this document, you will find all of the
instructions and recommendations on use
that will allow you to enjoy your vehicle to
the fullest. It is strongly recommended that
you familiarise yourself with it as well as the
Maintenance and Warranty Guide which will
provide you with information about warranties,
servicing and roadside assistance associated
with your vehicle.
This document presents the information and
recommendations required for you to be able to
explore your vehicle in complete safety.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of
the equipment described in this document,
depending on its trim level, version and the
specification for the country in which it was
sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as
indications only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to
modify the technical specifications, equipment
and accessories without having to update this
edition of the guide.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred,
please ensure this Handbook is passed on to
the new owner.
Key
Safety warning
Additional information
Contributes to the protection of the
environment
Left-hand drive vehicle
Key
This key will enable you to identify the special
features of your vehicle:
C4 SpaceTourer
Grand C4 SpaceTourer
Grand C4 SpaceTourer
5-seat
Grand C4 SpaceTourer
7-seat
Right-hand drive vehicle
Location of the equipment/button
described with a black zone
2
.
.
Contents
Instrument panels 8
Warning and indicator lamps 11
Indicators 26
Touch screen 31
Trip computer 36
Setting the date and time 39
Instruments and controls 4 Electronic key – Remote control 40
Keyless Entry and Starting 41
Central locking 43
Back-up procedures 45
Doors 47
Boot 47
Motorised tailgate 48
Hands-free tailgate 51
Alarm 53
Electric windows 55
Front seats 57
Rear seats 62
Seat modular design and conguration 67
Steering wheel adjustment 68
Mirrors 68
Ventilation 70
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
71
Heating 72
Dual-zone temperature-regulated manual air conditioning
72
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 74
Recirculation of interior air 76
Front demist – defrost 77
Rear screen demist – defrost 77
Fragrance diffuser 77
Front ttings 79
Rear ttings 84
Boot ttings 85
Courtesy lamps 87
Interior ambient lighting 88
Footwell lighting 88
Panoramic glass sunroof 89
Lighting control stalk 90
Automatic headlamp dipping 94
Headlamp adjustment 96
Cornering lighting 96
Directional lighting 97
Wiper control stalk 98
Automatic wiping 99
Screen wash 100
General safety recommendations 101
Hazard warning lamps 101
Horn 102
Emergency or assistance call 102
Electronic stability control (ESC) 103
Seat belts 106
Airbags 109
Child seats 112
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 113
ISOFIX mountings/child seats 119
Child lock 124
Overview
Instruments
Access
Ease of use and comfort
Safety
Lighting and visibility
Eco-driving
3
.
.
.
bit.ly/helpPSA
Contents
Driving advice 126
Starting/switching off the engine
using the electronic key 127
Starting/switching off the engine
with Keyless Entry and Starting 129
Switching the ignition on (without starting) 131
Electric parking brake 131
Hill start assist 134
5-speed manual gearbox 135
6-speed manual gearbox 135
Automatic gearbox 136
Gear efciency indicator 139
Stop & Start 140
Tyre under-ination detection 142
Memorising speeds 144
Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation 144
Speed limiter 147
Cruise control 148
Adaptive cruise control 151
Adaptive cruise control until vehicle is
stopped/until 19 mph (30 km/h) 157
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert
and Intelligent emergency braking
assistance 165
Lane Departure Warning System 169
Blind Spot Detection 173
Fatigue detection system 175
Parking sensors 176
Reversing camera 178
Vision 360 179
Park Assist 181
Compatibility of fuels 189
Fuel 190
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 191
Snow chains 191
Towing device 192
Towing system with quickly detachable towball 193
Load reduction mode 195
Energy economy mode 195
Changing a wiper blade 195
Roof bars 196
Very cold climate screen(s) 197
Bonnet 198
Engine compartment 199
Checking levels 199
Checks 202
AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi engines) 204
Warning triangle 208
Temporary puncture repair kit 208
Spare wheel 211
Changing a bulb 220
Changing a fuse 226
12 V battery 231
Towing 234
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 236
Engine technical data and towed loads 237
Engines and towed loads – PETROL 238
Engines and towed loads – DIESEL 240
Dimensions 243
Identication markings 244
Driving Practical information
In the event of a breakdown
Technical data
Alphabetical index
Audio and telematics
Access to additional videos
CITROËN Connect Radio
CITROËN Connect Nav
4
Overview
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls
(continued)
1
Door mirrors
Electric windows, deactivating
2
Bonnet release
3
Dashboard fuses
4
Automatic gearbox
5
Courtesy lamps
Rear view mirror
Child-monitoring mirror
Panoramic glass sunroof
Emergency or assistance call
6
Instrument panels
Gear efficiency indicator
Lighting dimmer
Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
- service indicator
- engine oil level indicator
- AdBlue
®
fluid range indicator
7
Touch screen
Equipment configuration
Date and time adjustment
Ventilation
Heating
Dual-zone manual air conditioning
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning
Demisting/Defrosting
8
Electric parking brake
9
5/6-speed manual gearbox
5
.Overview
7
Memorising speeds
Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control
Adaptive cruise control with Stop function
8
Inter-vehicle distance
Black panel
Choice of instrument panel display
mode (depending on version)
9
Audio and telematic system controls
1
Headlamp adjustment
2
Lighting control stalk
Direction indicators
Choice of instrument panel display
mode (depending on version)
3
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
4
Wiper and screenwash control stalk
Trip computer
5
START/STOP button
6
Hazard warning lamps
6
Eco-dr iv ing
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices
that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel
consumption and CO
2
emissions.
Optimise the use of your
gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently
and change up without waiting. When
accelerating, change up early.
With an automatic gearbox, give preference
to automatic mode and avoid pressing the
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to
engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the
indication is displayed in the instrument panel,
follow it straight away.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox,
this indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
use engine braking rather than the
brake pedal, and press the accelerator
progressively. These practices contribute
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also help reduce the
background traffic noise.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
opening the windows and air vents before
using the air conditioning.
Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
and leave the air vents open.
Consider using equipment that can help
keep the temperature in the passenger
compartment down (sunroof blind and window
blinds, etc.).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has
automatic regulation, as soon as the desired
temperature is attained.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
when the ambient light level does not require
their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off,
particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your
multimedia devices (film, music, video game
etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of
fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before
leaving the vehicle.
Limit the causes of excess
consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place
the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot,
as close as possible to the rear seats.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h)
when the traffic is flowing well.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls when not required, if they are not
automatically controlled.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
.
7
Eco-dr iv ing
Observe the recommendations
on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold,
referring to the label in the door aperture,
driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on
any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine
oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and
observe the schedule of operations in the
manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR
system is faulty, your vehicle becomes
polluting. Visit a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop as soon as possible to
bring your vehicle's nitrogen oxide emissions
back in line with the regulations.
When filling the tank, do not continue after the
3
rd
cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only
after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres)
that you will see the fuel consumption settle
down to a consistent average.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
refit your summer tyres.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a
roof box.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
8
Instruments
Digital monochrome
instrument panel
Dials and display screens
1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), graduation
depends on the engine (petrol or Diesel).
2. Gear efficiency indicator, selector position
and the gear with an automatic gearbox.
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
5. Fuel gauge.
6. Service indicator, then total distance
recorder (miles or km).
These functions are displayed
successively on switching on the ignition.
7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
8. Reminder of heating and air conditioning
settings.
Control buttons
A. Instrument panel and touch screen lighting
dimmer buttons.
B. Reminder of the service information.
Resetting of the selected function (service
indicator or trip distance recorder).
Reminder of the remaining range with the
SCR system and the AdBlue
®
.
Alert log (current alerts).
12-inch HD colour
instrument panel
This instrument panel can be customised.
Depending on the selected display mode, some
information may be hidden.
Dials and display screens
1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), ("Dials" mode).
2. Gear efficiency indicator, selector position
and the gear with an automatic gearbox.
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
5. Fuel gauge.
6. Total distance recorder (miles or km).
7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
8. Reminder of current media or telephone
information.
9. Reminder of trip computer information.
10. Exterior temperature (blue warning lamp
comes on if there is a risk of ice).
Control button
A. Reminder of the service information.
Reminder of the remaining range with the
SCR system and the AdBlue
®
.
Resetting of the selected function (service
indicator or trip distance recorder).
9
1
Instruments
Display areas
Most warning and indicator lamps do not have
a fixed position.
The warning and indicator lamps are displayed
from right to left in order of priority.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
for both operation and for deactivation, there is
only one dedicated location.
Customisation of the 12-inch
colour instrument panel
You can modify the appearance of the
instrument panel, by choosing:
- a coloured ambience,
- a display mode.
As a safety measure, these adjustments should
be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
Choice of language
It depends on the configuration of the touch
screen.
Certain languages are not available for this
instrument panel, English is selected by default.
Choice of coloured ambience
Perform changes when the vehicle is stationary:
Choice of display mode
or
Whatever the display mode or coloured
ambience selected, the instrument panel
includes:
- a fixed display area A with:
• the speedometer,
• the warning and indicator lamps,
• the fuel gauge,
• the various information reminders and
warning messages,
- a configurable display area B.
F Press this button in the
"Settings" menu of the touch
screen.
The system restarts to take the modifications
on the touch screen and instrument panel into
account.
Each mode corresponds to the type of
information displayed in the configuration zone.
F Turn the knob located to the left of the
steering wheel to display and scroll through
the different modes on the right hand-side
of the instrument panel,
F once the desired display mode appears,
press on the knob to validate.
F Press the end of the lighting control stalk
to display and scroll through the different
modes on the right hand-side of the
instrument panel,
10
Instruments
- "Dials": permanent display of the trip
computer and the rev counter.
- "Navigation": display of current navigation
information (map and instructions).
- "Minimal": no information displayed.
F once the selected display mode appears,
it is automatically applied after a few
moments with no action on the control stalk.
- "Driving": display of the rev counter and
driving information (inter-vehicle time, etc.)
- "Personal": choice of information to be
displayed in each of the 2 display zones
(1/3 central and 1/3 right) among:
• trip computer,
• media,
• navigation,
• driving aids,
• rev counter,
• engine coolant temperature gauge,
• no information (blank).
Lighting dimmer
Allows manual adjustment of the brightness
of the instrument panel and touch screen
according to the exterior brightness.
11
1
Instruments
Two buttons
Touch screen
F In the Settings menu, select "Brightness".
F Adjust the brightness by pressing the
arrows or moving the slider.
Black panel (comfortable
night driving display)
When driving at night, this function allows
certain instrument panel displays to be
switched off so as to reduce visual fatigue for
the driver.
The essential driving information, such as the
vehicle speed, warning and indicator lamps,
the cruise control or speed limiter, remains
displayed in the instrument panel.
Using the steering mounted
control
Black panel (touch screen)
F In the Settings menu, select "Dark". The
screen goes off.
F Press the screen again (anywhere on its
surface) to switch it on again.
Only works when the vehicle lamps are on,
except daytime running lamps.
With the exterior lighting on, press button A to
increase the brightness of the instruments and
controls and the ambience of the vehicle or
button B to reduce it.
As soon as the lighting reaches the required
level of brightness, release the button.
F With the exterior lighting on, press this
button to activate the black panel.
F Press the button once again to deactivate it.
Warning and indicator
lamps
Displayed as symbols, the warning and
indicator lamps inform the driver of the
occurrence of a malfunction (warning lamps) or
of the operating status of a system (operation
or deactivation indicator lamps). Certain lamps
light up in two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in
several colours.
Associated warnings
The illumination of a lamp can be accompanied
by an audible signal and/or a message
displayed in a screen.
Relating the type of alert to the operating status
of the vehicle allows you to determine whether
the situation is normal or a fault has occurred:
refer to the description of each lamp for further
information.
12
Instruments
When the ignition is switched on
Certain red or orange warning lamps come on
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon
as the engine is started.
Persistent warning lamp
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of a red or orange
warning lamp indicates a fault that needs
further investigation, using any associated
message and the description of the warning
lamp in the documentation.
Where a warning lamp remains lit
The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether
you should contact a qualified professional
in addition to the immediate recommended
actions.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
13
1
Instruments
List of warning and indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Red warning/indicator lamps
STOP Fixed, associated
with another warning
lamp, accompanied
by the display of
a message and an
audible signal.
Indicates a serious fault with the
engine, braking system, power
steering or a major electrical fault.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Engine oil
pressure
Fixed. There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Brakes Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped
significantly.
Carry out (1), then top up with brake fluid that
complies with the manufacturer's recommendations.
If the problem persists, carry out (2).
+
Fixed. The electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
14
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Electric parking
brake
Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.
Flashing. The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
Carry out (1): park on flat level ground (horizontally).
With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
With an automatic gearbox, select mode P.
Switch off the ignition and carry out (2).
+
+
+
Operating fault
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
The parking brake is not operating
at maximum efficiency and cannot
ensure parking the vehicle in
complete safety in all situations.
Make your vehicle safe:
F Park on a level surface.
F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, with P selected, place
the chocks supplied against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
Maximum
coolant
temperature
Fixed. The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has cooled
down before topping up to the required level if
necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
Battery charge Fixed. The battery charging circuit has
a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack
or cut alternator belt, etc.).
Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning lamp
does not go off when the engine is started, carry out (2).
15
1
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Door open* Fixed, associated with
a message identifying
the access.
An audible signal
supplements the alert
if the speed is higher
than 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door, the boot, the tailgate or
the tailgate screen is still open
(depending on version).
Close the access.
Seat belt not
fastened/
unfastened
Fixed or flashing,
accompanied by an
audible signal.
A seat belt has not been fastened or
has been unfastened.
Orange warning/indicator lamps
Operating fault
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed. The electric parking brake has
a fault.
Carry out (3) quickly.
+
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
You can no longer immobilise the
vehicle with the engine running.
If manual application and release are not working, the
electric parking brake control lever is faulty.
The automatic functions must be used at all times and
are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of
the control lever.
Carry out (2).
* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.
16
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
+
+
Operating fault
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
The parking brake is faulty: manual
and automatic functions may not be
working.
When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately
7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, make your vehicle
safe:
F Park on a level surface.
F If you have a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, select P, then put the
supplied chocks against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions (with
electric parking
brake)
Fixed. The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" (on acceleration)
functions are deactivated.
In the event of a fault, illumination of
this warning lamp is accompanied by
a message.
Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no
longer possible.
The brake can be applied or released manually.
+
Automatic
application
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
The automatic application is not
available, the parking brake can only
be used manually.
Use the electric parking brake control lever.
If automatic release is also not available, use manual
release.
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has
a fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed, then carry out (3).
17
1
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Service Temporarily on,
accompanied by the
display of a message.
One or more minor faults have
been detected for which there is no
specific warning lamp.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the instrument panel.
You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for
example an open door or the start of saturation of the
particle filter.
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under-inflation detection system, carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message.
One or more major faults have
been detected for which there is no
specific warning lamp.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
'Parking brake fault'.
Automatic release of the electric
parking brake is unavailable.
Use manual release.
+
Service warning lamp
fixed and service
spanner flashing then
fixed.
The servicing interval has been
exceeded.
Only with BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
18
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
AdBlue
®
(access via the
boot)
Fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is
between 1,500 and 375 miles
(2,400 and 600 km).
Top up the AdBlue
®
as soon as possible, or carry out (3).
+
AdBlue
®
warning lamp
flashing and Service
warning lamp fixed,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The driving range is less than
375 miles (600 km).
You must top up the AdBlue
®
to avoid a breakdown,
or carry out (3).
AdBlue
®
warning lamp
flashing and Service
warning lamp fixed,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
that starting is
prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting inhibition system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue
®
or carry out (2).
It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue
®
to its
tank.
19
1
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
AdBlue
®
(access via the
fuel filler flap)
On for around
30 seconds when
starting the vehicle,
accompanied by
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 1,500 and 500 miles
(2,400 and 800 km).
Top up the AdBlue
®
.
Fixed, on switching on
the ignition, accompanied
by an audible signal and
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is
between 500 and 62 miles (800 and
100 km).
Top up the AdBlue
®
as soon as possible, or carry
out (3).
Flashing,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The driving range is less than
62 miles (100 km).
You must top up the AdBlue
®
to avoid starting
being prevented, or carry out (3).
Flashing,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
that starting is
prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting prevention system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue
®
or carry out (2).
It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue
®
to its
tank.
20
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
Fixed on switching on the
ignition, associated with
the Service and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message.
A fault with the SCR emissions
control system has been detected.
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
return to normal levels.
Flashing on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
Service and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
Depending on the message
displayed, you can continue driving
for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before
the engine starting prevention
system is triggered.
Carry out (3) as soon as possible to avoid
a breakdown.
Flashing on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
Service and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
An engine immobiliser prevents
the engine from restarting (over
the authorised driving limit after
confirmation of a fault with the
emissions control system).
To start the engine, carry out (2).
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
21
1
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Engine
diagnostic
system
Flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.
Carry out (2) without fail.
Fixed. The emissions control system has
a fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
Carry out (3) quickly.
Collision Risk
Alert/Active
Safety Brake
Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message.
The system has been deactivated,
via the vehicle configuration menu.
Flashing. The system is operating. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
of collision with the vehicle ahead.
Fixed, accompanied
by a message and an
audible signal.
The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
Flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is activated
if there is a loss of grip or trajectory.
Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3).
+
Emergency
brake anomaly
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
Emergency braking does not have
full power.
If automatic release is not available, use manual
release.
22
Instruments
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Under-inflation Fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
The pressure in one or more tyres is
too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the
pressure.
+
Under-inflation
Under-inflation
warning lamp flashing
then fixed and Service
warning lamp fixed.
The system is faulty: tyre pressures
are no longer monitored.
Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored.
As soon as possible, check the pressure of the tyres
and carry out (3).
Diesel engine
pre-heating
Temporarily on. When switching on the ignition, if the
weather conditions and the engine
temperature make it necessary.
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
When the warning lamp goes off, starting is
immediate if you press and hold:
- the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox.
- the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox.
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Airbags Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt
pretensioners is faulty.
Carry out (3).
Front passenger
airbag (ON)
Fixed. The front passenger airbag is
activated.
The control is in the "ON" position.
In this case, do NOT install a "rearward facing"
child seat on the front passenger seat – Risk of
serious injury!
23
1
Instruments
Low fuel level Fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
When it first comes on, there
remains approximately 6 litres of
fuel in the tank (reserve).
Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
Never drive until completely empty, this could
damage the emissions and injection systems.
Lane Departure
Warning System
Fixed. The system has been automatically
deactivated or placed on standby.
Flashing. You are about to cross a broken
lane marking without operating the
direction indicators.
The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory
on the side of the lane marking detected.
+
Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message and an
audible signal.
The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Stop & Start Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message.
The Stop & Start system is
deactivated.
The engine will not switch off at the next traffic stop.
Reactivate the function via the touch screen
configuration menu.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Passenger
airbag system
Flashing. The passenger airbag system is
defective.
Carry out (3).
Fixed. The front passenger airbag is
deactivated.
The control is in the "OFF" position.
You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, unless
there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp
on).
24
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Foot on the
brake*
Fixed. Omission or insufficient pressure on
the brake pedal.
With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running,
before releasing the parking brake, to move out of
position P.
Foot on the
clutch*
Fixed. Stop & Start: the change to START
mode is rejected because the clutch
pedal is not fully depressed.
Fully depress the clutch pedal.
Rear foglamp Fixed. The lamp is on.
Green warning/indicator lamps
Stop & Start Fixed.
When the vehicle stops, the Stop &
Start puts the engine into STOP mode.
Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily
unavailable or START mode is
automatically triggered.
Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.
Blind spot
monitoring
Fixed. The function has been activated.
* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.
25
1
Instruments
Left-hand
direction
indicator
Flashing with audible
signal.
The direction indicators are on.
Right-hand
direction indicator
Flashing with audible
signal.
The direction indicators are on.
Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.
Dipped beam
headlamps
Fixed. The lamps are on.
Directional
headlamps
Flashing. The directional headlamps system
has a fault.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are on.
Automatic
wiping
Fixed. Automatic windscreen wiping is
activated.
+
or
Automatic
headlamp
dipping
Fixed. The function has been activated in
the touch screen (Driving menu).
The lighting control stalk is in the
"AUTO" position.
Blue warning/indicator lamps
Main beam
headlamps
Fixed. The main beams are on.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
26
Instruments
Indicators
Service indicator
The service indicator is displayed in the
instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle
version:
- the distance recorder display line indicates
the distance remaining before the next
service is due, or the distance travelled
since it was due preceded by the sign "-".
- an alert message indicates the distance
remaining, as well as the period before the
next service is due or how long it is overdue.
Warning/indicator
lamp
State Cause
Actions/
Observations
Service
spanner
Lights up temporarily
when the ignition is
switched on.
Between 620 and
1,860 miles (1,000 and
3,000 km) remain before
the next service is due.
Fixed, when the
ignition is switched on.
The service is due in
less than 620 miles
(1,000 km).
Have your vehicle
serviced very soon.
+
Service
spanner
flashing
Flashing then fixed,
when the ignition is
switched on.
(For BlueHDi Diesel
versions, associated
with the Service
warning lamp).
The servicing interval
has been exceeded.
Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as
possible.
The distance indicated (in miles or
kilometres) is calculated according to the
distance covered and the time elapsed
since the last service.
The alert may be triggered close to a due
date.
Resetting the service indicator
The service indicator must be reset after each
service.
If you have carried out the service on your
vehicle yourself:
F switch off the ignition,
If you have to disconnect the battery
following this operation, lock the vehicle
and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to
be registered.
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F release the button when "=0" is displayed;
the spanner disappears.
27
1
Instruments
You can access the service information at any
time.
F Press the trip distance recorder reset
button.
The service information is displayed for
a few seconds, then disappears.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
(Only with the 12" colour instrument panel.)
With the engine running, when the needle is:
- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
- in zone B, the temperature is too high;
the maximum temperature and the
central STOP warning lamps come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and
a warning message.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
and pressure in the cooling system increase.
To top up the level:
F wait for the engine to cool,
F unscrew the cap slightly to allow the
pressure to drop,
F when the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap,
F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
Be aware of the risk of scalding when
topping up the coolant. Do not fill above
the maximum level (indicated on the
reservoir).
Engine oil level indicator
(Depending on version.)
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
displayed in the instrument panel for a few
seconds, after the servicing information.
The level read will only be correct if the
vehicle is on level ground and the engine
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
Oil level correct
Oil level incorrect
Oil level indicator fault
Retrieving the service
information
This is indicated by the display of the message
"Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
screen, accompanied by the Service warning
lamp and an audible signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
avoid damage to the engine.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
28
Instruments
This is signalled by the display of the message "Oil
level measurement invalid" in the instrument panel.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In the event of a fault with the electric
indicator, the engine oil level is no longer
monitored.
If the system is faulty, you must check the
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
located under the bonnet.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
AdBlue
®
range indicators
These range indicators are present only on
BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is on reserve or after
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system, when the ignition is switched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented.
In the event of the risk of non-
starting related to a lack of
AdBlue
®
The engine starting prevention system
required by regulations is activated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tank is
empty.
Range greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km)
When switching on the ignition, there is no
automatic display of range in the instrument
panel.
With the 12" colour instrument panel, pressing
this button temporarily displays the driving
range.
With access via the boot
Remaining range between 1,500 and
375 miles (2,400 and 600 km)
When driving, the message is displayed every
185 miles (300 km) until the level is topped up.
The reserve level has been reached; it is
recommended that you top up as soon as
possible.
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message ("Top
up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles")
indicating the remaining range expressed in
miles or kilometres.
Remaining range less than 375 miles (600 km)
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by the permanent
lighting of the Service warning lamp, an audible
signal and the display of a message ("Top
up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles")
indicating the remaining range in miles or
kilometres.
When driving, this message is displayed every
30 seconds until the AdBlue level has been
topped up.
It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
it will not be possible to restart the engine after
the next stop.
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp
flashes, and the Service warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal and the display of
the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible".
29
1
Instruments
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the starting
inhibition system required by legislation
prevents starting of the engine.
To be able to restart the engine, it is
essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue
®
to its tank.
For more information on AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi engines), and, in particular,
on topping up, refer to the corresponding
section.
With access via the fuel ller ap
Range between 1,500 and 500 miles
(2,400 and 800 km)
Range between 500 and 62 miles (800 and 100 km)
Range less than 62 miles (100 km)
When driving, the audible signal and the
message display are triggered every 6 miles
(10 km) until the AdBlue tank is topped up.
It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
it will not be possible to restart the engine after
the next stop.
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the starting
inhibition system required by legislation
prevents starting of the engine.
To be able to restart the engine, it is
essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue
®
to its tank.
For more information on AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi engines), and, in particular,
on topping up, refer to the corresponding
section.
Each time the vehicle is started, this warning
lamp comes on for about 30 seconds,
accompanied by the display of a message
("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x
miles") indicating the remaining range in miles
or kilometres.
The reserve level has been reached; it is
recommended that you top up as soon as
possible.
These messages are accompanied by the
recommendation to not top up with more than
10 litres of AdBlue.
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal (1 beep) and the display of a message
("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in
x miles") indicating the remaining range
expressed in miles or kilometres.
When driving, the audible signal and the
message display are triggered every 62 miles
(100 km) until the fluid is topped up.
It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
it will not be possible to restart the engine after
the next stop.
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal (1 beep) and the display of a message
("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x
miles") indicating the remaining range in miles
or kilometres.
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by the display
of the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting
impossible".
30
Instruments
In the event of a fault with the
SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting is
activated automatically from 685 miles
(1,100 km) after confirmation of a fault with
the SCR emissions control system.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey, after
self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
During the permitted driving phase
(between 685 and 0 miles (1,100 and 0 km))
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
The alert is repeated when switching on the
ignition.
You should go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
Starting prevented
You have exceeded the authorised driving
limit: the starting prevention system does
not allow the engine to be started.
These warning lamps come on, accompanied
by an audible signal and the display of the
message "Emissions fault".
The alert is triggered when driving when the
fault is detected for the first time, then when
switching on the ignition for subsequent
journeys, while the fault persists.
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed
(after 31 miles (50 km) covered with the
permanent display of the message signalling
a fault), these warning lamps come on and the
AdBlue warning lamp flashes, accompanied by
an audible signal and the display of a message
(e.g. "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in
185 miles") indicating the remaining range in
miles or kilometres.
Each time the ignition is switched on, these
warning lamps come on and the AdBlue
warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
To be able to start the engine, you must call on
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
When travelling abroad, you may need
to change the unit of distance: the speed
display must be expressed in the official
units of the country (km or miles). The
change of units is done via the screen
configuration menu, with the vehicle
stationary.
31
1
Instruments
Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
Trip recorder
It measures the distance travelled since it was
reset by the driver.
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Touch screen
The touch screen gives access to:
- the heating/air conditioning controls,
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
functions and systems,
- audio system and telephone controls and
the display of associated information,
and, depending on equipment, allows:
- the display of alert messages and the visual
parking sensors information,
- the permanent display of the time and the
exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp
appears when there is a risk of ice),
- access to the internet services and
navigation system controls and the display
of associated information.
As a safety measure, the driver should
only carry out operations that require
close attention with the vehicle
stationary.
Some functions are not accessible when
driving.
General operation
Recommendations
Use is possible in all temperatures.
Principles
Use the buttons on each side of the touch
screen to access the menus, then use the
buttons that appear on the touch screen.
Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or
2 pages.
To deactivate/activate a function, press OFF/
ON.
To modify a setting (lighting duration, etc.) or
find additional information, press the symbol for
the function.
After a few moments with no action on
the secondary page, the primary page is
displayed automatically.
Use this button to confirm.
Do not use pointed objects on the touch
screen.
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
Use a soft clean cloth to clean the touch
screen.
Use this button to return to the
previous page.
32
Instruments
Menus
For more information on Heating, Manual
air conditioning and Automatic air
conditioning, refer to the corresponding
sections.
Upper bar
* Depending on equipment
Certain information is always present in the
upper bar of the touch screen:
- Summary of air conditioning information and
access to the simplified menu (temperature
and air flow adjustment only).
- Summary of information from the Radio
Media, Telephone menus and navigation
instructions*.
- Notifications zone (texts and email)*.
Air conditioning.
Allows adjustment of the various
settings for temperature, air flow,
etc.
Connected navigation.
See the "Audio and telematics" section.
Radio Media.
See the "Audio and telematics" section.
Telephone.
See the "Audio and telematics" section.
Applications.
Enables the trip computer to
be displayed with the digital
monochrome instrument panel.
See the "Audio and telematics" section.
Driving.
Allows the activation, deactivation
and adjustment of settings for
certain functions.
The functions accessible from this menu are
arranged under two tabs: "Vehicle settings"
and "Driving functions".
Volume control/mute.
See the "Audio and telematics"
section.
Access to Configuration.
33
1
Instruments
Driving menu
Vehicle settings tab
Families Functions with CITROËN Connect Radio Functions with CITROËN Connect Nav
Driving lighting - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of
automatic guide-me-home lighting.
- "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior
welcome lighting.
- "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the
cornering lighting/directional headlamps.
-
"Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps)
depending on country of sale.
- "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the
cornering lighting/directional headlamps.
-
"Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps)
depending on country of sale.
Vehicle access - "Unlock driver's door only": activation/deactivation of
selective unlocking of the driver's door.
- "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of unlocking
at the tailgate.
- "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of
motorised operation of the tailgate.
- "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation
of the hands-free tailgate function.
- "Unlock driver's door only": activation/deactivation of
selective unlocking of the driver's door.
- "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of unlocking
at the tailgate.
- "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of
motorised operation of the tailgate.
- "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation
of the hands-free tailgate function.
The functions are grouped into 4 families.
34
Instruments
Families Functions with CITROËN Connect Radio Functions with CITROËN Connect Nav
Comfort - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the
rear wiper on with reverse gear.
- "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior
ambient lighting.
- "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation
of the automatic mirror tilt when engaging reverse
gear.
- "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the
rear wiper on with reverse gear.
- "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of
automatic guide-me-home lighting.
- "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior
welcome lighting.
- "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior
ambient lighting.
- "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation
of the automatic mirror tilt when engaging reverse
gear.
Security - "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the
collision risk alert.
- "Recommended speed display": activation/
deactivation of speed limit recognition.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of
the driver fatigue detection system.
- "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the
collision risk alert.
- "Recommended speed display": activation/
deactivation of speed limit recognition.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of
the driver fatigue detection system.
For more information on one of these
functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
35
1
Instruments
Driving functions tab
Function Comment
Adjusting Speeds Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter, cruise control and adaptive cruise control.
Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.
Diagnostic List of current alerts.
Lane assist Activation/deactivation of the "active lane departure warning" system.
Parking sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.
Automatic headlamp dipping Activation/deactivation of the "automatic headlamp dipping" function.
Stop & Start Activation/deactivation of the function.
Blind spot sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.
Panoramic visual aid Activation/deactivation of the function and then choice of options.
Active cruise control Choice of the standard cruise control or adaptive cruise control function.
Traction control Activation/deactivation of the function.
For more information on one of these
functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
36
Instruments
The functions available through the
upper menu bar are detailed in the
table below. Certain settings can be
accessed on the second page.
Conguration
Button Comments
Switch off the screen.
Brightness adjustment.
Choice and configuration of
three personalised profiles and
a common profile.
Touch screen and instrument
panel settings, etc.
Activation and adjustment of the
Wi-Fi settings.
Button Comments
Adjustment of the display
parameters (text scrolling,
animations, etc.) and
brightness.
Choose an ambience for the 12-
inch colour instrument panel.
Choice of the type of
information displayed in the 12-
inch colour instrument panel.
Choice of units:
- temperature (°Celsius or
°Fahrenheit)
- distances and fuel consumption
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Choice of language for the
touch screen and 12-inch colour
instrument panel.
Setting the date and time.
Trip computer
System that gives you information on
the current journey (range, current fuel
consumption, average fuel consumption, etc.).
Digital monochrome
instrument panel
The data is accessible in the
"Driving" menu.
Permanent display:
F Select the "Applications" menu, then "Trip
computer".
The information of the trip computer is
displayed in tabs.
F Press one of the buttons to display the
desired tab.
37
1
Instruments
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the reset button or on the end of the wiper
control stalk.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used
identically.
For example, trip 1 can be used for daily
calculations, and trip 2 for monthly calculations.
12" colour instrument panel
Display of data on the instrument
panel
Trip computer data is displayed permanently
when you select the "Dials" or "Personal"
display mode.
F Press the button on the end of the wiper
control stalk to display the various tabs in
succession.
The current information tab with:
- Range.
- Current fuel consumption.
- Stop & Start time counter.
The trip "1" tab with:
- Average speed for the first trip.
- Average fuel consumption.
- Distance travelled.
The trip "2" tab with:
- Average speed for the second trip.
- Average fuel consumption.
- Distance travelled.
Trip reset
Temporary display in a specific window:
F Press the end of the wiper control stalk for
access to the information and to display the
different tabs.
In all other display modes, pressing the end of
the wiper control stalk will cause this data to
appear temporarily in a specific window.
38
Instruments
- The current information tab with:
• range,
• current fuel consumption,
• Stop & Start time counter.
- Trip 1 with:
• the average speed,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the distance travelled,
for the first trip.
- Trip 2 with:
• the average speed,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the distance travelled,
for the second trip.
Resetting the trip recorder
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the button at the end of the wiper control
stalk for more than two seconds.
Trips 1 and 2 are independent and are used
identically.
For example, trip 1 can be used for daily
calculations, and trip 2 for monthly calculations.
A few definitions
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining in
the tank (related to the average fuel
consumption over the last few miles
(kilometres) travelled).
This value may vary following a change in
the style of driving or the terrain, resulting
in a significant change in the current fuel
consumption.
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed if it exceeds 62 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated during the last few
seconds.
This function is only displayed from
19 mph (30 km/h).
Average fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last time the
trip was reset.
39
1
Instruments
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last time the
trip was reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last time the
trip was reset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
A time counter calculates the total of the
periods in STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
switched on.
Average speed
Setting the date and time
With CITROËN Connect
Radio
F Select the Settings menu.
F Select "System configuration".
F Select "Date and time".
F Select "Date" or "Time".
F Choose the display formats.
F Change the date and/or time using the
numeric keypad.
F Press this button to confirm.
With CITROËN Connect Nav
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if synchronisation with GPS is
deactivated.
F Select the Settings menu.
F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
F Select "Setting the time-date".
F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab.
F Adjust the date and/or time using the
numeric keypad.
F Press this button to confirm.
F Press this button to confirm.
Additional adjustments
You can choose:
- To change the display format of the date
and time (12h/24h).
- To change the time zone.
- To activate or deactivate synchronisation
with the GPS (UTC).
The system does not automatically
manage the change between winter and
summer time (depending on country).
The change between winter and summer
time is done by changing the time zone.
40
Acc ess
Electronic key – Remote
control
System that enables the activation of the
unlocking and locking of the vehicle, the
opening of the boot and, depending on the
version, the alarm from a distance.
It also locates and starts the vehicle, as well as
protecting against theft.
A. Unlocking the vehicle.
B. Central locking system of the vehicle.
C. Locking the vehicle, and depending on the
version, releasing the tailgate or opening
the motorised tailgate.
The electronic key includes an integral back-up
key.
Unlocking the vehicle
Complete unlocking
F Press the button.
Selective unlocking
It is set via the Driving menu.
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
F To unlock the driver's door only, press the
unlocking button once.
F To unlock the other doors and the boot,
press the button again.
Unlocking the vehicle and
opening the boot
F Press and hold this button
to unlock the vehicle and,
depending on version, release
the tailgate or open the
motorised tailgate.
The setting for the motorised tailgate
is in the Driving menu.
By default, motorised operation is activated.
The direction indicators flash for
a few seconds. The spotlamps in the
door mirrors come on. Depending on
version, the door mirrors unfold, the
welcome lighting comes on, the alarm is
deactivated.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking
F Press the button.
Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be
raised to the desired position.
Ensure that nothing could prevent the
correct operation of the windows.
Be aware of children when operating the
windows.
The direction indicators come on for a few
seconds.
Depending on your version, the door
mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.
41
2
Acc ess
This function allows you to identify your vehicle
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
vehicle must be locked.
If one of the openings (doors or boot) is
still open, the locking does not take place.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and
with no action on the doors or boot, the
vehicle will lock itself again automatically
after about 30 seconds.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also
be reactivated automatically.
The automatic folding and unfolding
of the door mirrors can be deactivated
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking deactivates the interior door
controls and it also deactivates the manual
central control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
vehicle when it is deadlocked.
F With the vehicle unlocked, press the locking
button.
Locating your vehicle
F Within five seconds, press the button again
to deadlock the vehicle.
F Press this button.
The direction indicators will flash for around
10 seconds and the courtesy lamps will switch on.
Keyless Entry and
Starting
The electronic key is also used as
a remote control. For more information
on the Remote Control, refer to the
corresponding section.
For reasons of safety and theft protection,
do not leave your electronic key in the
vehicle, even when you are close to it.
It is recommended that you keep it on your
person.
Unlocking the vehicle
Complete unlocking
F With the electronic key on your person and in
recognition zone A, pass your hand behind
the door handle of one of the front doors
to unlock the vehicle or press the tailgate
opening control (situated in the centre).
This system allows the unlocking, locking
and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the
electronic key in the recognition zone "A".
42
Acc ess
Selective unlocking
Activation or deactivation of selective
locking of the tailgate is done in the
Driving menu.
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
F To unlock only the driver's door, with the
electronic key on your person, pass your
hand behind the driver's door handle.
F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your
hand behind the front passenger door
handle with the electronic key close to
the passenger door, or press the tailgate
opening control with the electronic key close
to the rear of the vehicle.
The direction indicators flash for a few
seconds.
Depending on your version, the door
mirrors fold, the alarm is deactivated and
the welcome lighting comes on.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking
Ensure that nothing could prevent the
proper closure of the windows.
Be aware of children when operating the
windows.
The direction indicators come on for a few
seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors
fold and the alarm is activated.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking deactivates the interior door
controls and it also deactivates the manual
central control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
vehicle when it is deadlocked.
F With the key in recognition zone A, press
on one of the front door handles (at the
markings) to lock the vehicle or on the
locking control located on the tailgate (on
the right) for versions that are not equipped
with the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
function.
Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be
raised to the desired position.
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the
keys is left inside the vehicle.
By the doors or tailgate:
F With the electronic key in recognition zone
A, press the door handle of one of the
front doors (at the markings), or the locking
control located on the tailgate (on the right)
for versions that are not equipped with the
"Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function, to
lock the vehicle.
F Within 5 seconds, press the door handle
again, or the locking control on the tailgate
(on the right) for versions that are not
equipped with the "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function, to deadlock the vehicle.
43
2
Acc ess
If one of the doors or the boot is still open
or if the electronic key for the Keyless
Entry and Starting system has been left
inside the vehicle, the central locking does
not take place.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and
no action is taken at the doors or boot, the
vehicle will automatically lock itself again
after about 30 seconds.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also
be reactivated automatically.
The automatic folding and unfolding
of the door mirrors can be deactivated
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
As a safety measure (children on board),
never leave the vehicle without taking the
electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
Starting system with you, even for a short
period.
Be aware of the risk of theft when the
electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
Starting system is in one of the defined
zones with the vehicle unlocked.
In order to preserve the battery in the
electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
the "hands-free" functions are put into
long-term standby after 21 days without
use. To restore these functions, press
one of the remote control buttons or start
the engine with the electronic key in the
reader.
For more information on starting with
Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the
corresponding section.
Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt,
etc.) on the inner surface of the door
handle may affect detection.
If cleaning the inner surface of the door
handle using a cloth does not restore
detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of water,
high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be
identified by the system as the desire to
open the vehicle.
Central locking
Manual
F Press this button to operate the central
locking of the vehicle (doors and boot) from
inside the vehicle. The indicator lamp in the
button comes on.
F Pressing the button again unlocks the
vehicle completely. The indicator lamp in
the button goes off.
44
Acc ess
The indicator lamp also goes off when
unlocking one or more doors.
The central locking does not work if one of
the doors is open.
If the vehicle is locked from the outside or
deadlocked, this button does not work. To
unlock the vehicle from the inside:
F After normal locking, pull one of the
interior door controls.
F After deadlocking, use the remote
control, the Keyless Entry and Starting
system or the integral key.
Automatic (anti-intrusion
security)
The doors and boot lock automatically when
driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)).
To deactivate or reactivate this function
(activated by default):
F Press the button until a message appears in
the instrument panel.
Transporting long or voluminous
objects
Press the central locking control to
drive with the boot open and the doors
unlocked.
Advice
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is
a sensitive system; do not operate it while
it is in your pocket as there is a possibility
that it may unlock the vehicle, without you
being aware of it.
Do not press the buttons of your remote
control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. The remote control may stop
working and would have to be reinitialised.
The remote control cannot operate when
the key is in the reader, even when the
ignition is switched on.
Electrical interference
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic
key may not operate if close to certain
electronic devices: telephone, laptop
computer, strong magnetic fields, etc.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the
electronic engine immobiliser system; this
could cause malfunctions.
Do not forget to turn the steering wheel to
engage the steering lock.
45
2
Acc ess
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may render
access by the emergency services to the
interior difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on
board), take the electronic key with you when
you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by
a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only ones
which can start the vehicle.
Back-up procedures
Lost keys, remote control,
electronic key
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
registration certificate, your personal
identification documents and if possible, the
label bearing the key code.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the
key code and the transponder code required to
order a new key.
Back-up opening/closing
with the integral key
If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this
function will not be activated when locking
with the key.
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
on opening the door; switch on the ignition
to stop it.
Central locking not
functioning
The integral key is used to lock and unlock
the vehicle when there is a malfunction of
the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system caused in particular by:
- key battery flat, vehicle battery discharged
or disconnected, etc.
- vehicle located in an area with strong
electromagnetic signals.
F To extract the back-up key, pull and hold
button 1 while extracting key 2.
The integral key also enables:
- deactivation/reactivation of the front
passenger airbag,
- back-up locking of the passenger doors,
- locking of the vehicle without the alarm
being activated.
F Insert the key in the door lock.
F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle
to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.
F Turn the key rearwards again within
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Flashing of the direction indicators for a few
seconds confirms that the procedure has
completed correctly.
Use these procedures in the following cases:
- central locking fault,
- battery disconnected or discharged.
46
Acc ess
In the event of a malfunction with the
central locking system, the battery must
be disconnected to lock the boot and thus
ensure that the vehicle is locked fully.
Driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock.
F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle
to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not
activated/deactivated when the vehicle is
locked/unlocked.
Opening a door will trigger the alarm,
which can be stopped by switching the
ignition on.
Passenger doors
F Open the doors.
F For the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on.
F Insert the key into the latch on the edge of
the door and turn it an eighth of a turn to
the right, for the right-hand side, and to the
left, for the left-hand side. The locking is
effective when the slot is horizontal.
F Close the doors and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked.
Remote control problem –
reinitialisation
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the
remote control) in the lock to unlock your
vehicle.
F Place the electronic key in the reader.
F Switch on the ignition by pressing "START/
STOP".
The electronic key is fully operational again.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
47
2
Acc ess
Changing the battery
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Doors
Opening
From outside
F After unlocking the vehicle or with the
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Starting system in the recognition zone, pull
the door handle.
From inside
F Pull the interior opening control of a front
door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.
Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
- engine running, this warning
lamp and a message appear
in the instrument panel (digital
monochrome) for a few seconds,
- vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp and a message appear
in the instrument panel (digital
monochrome and 12 inch colour)
for a few seconds, accompanied
by an audible signal.
Battery ref.: CR2032/3 volts.
Battery replacement is signalled by the display
of a message.
F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver
at the cutout.
F Remove the cover.
F Remove the discharged battery from its
housing.
F Place the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
F Clip the cover onto the casing.
Boot
Opening the tailgate
Using the electronic key/remote
control
F Press and hold this button to
release the tailgate. If the vehicle
was locked, this action unlocks
the vehicle beforehand.
F Raise the tailgate.
When selective unlocking is activated, the
electronic key must be close to the rear of
the vehicle.
With the tailgate opening control
48
Acc ess
The tailgate is not designed to support
a bicycle carrier.
Closing the tailgate
F Lower the tailgate using the interior grips.
F Release the grips and press down on the
outside of the tailgate to close it.
If the tailgate is not properly closed:
F With the vehicle unlocked or with the
electronic key of the " Keyless Entry and
Starting" system in the coverage zone,
press control A on the tailgate.
F Raise the tailgate.
- engine running, this warning
lamp and a message appear
in the instrument panel (digital
monochrome) for a few seconds,
- vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp and a message appear
in the instrument panel (digital
monochrome and 12 inch colour)
for a few seconds, accompanied
by an audible signal.
In the event of a fault or difficulties felt in
manoeuvring the tailgate when opening
or closing it, have it quickly checked
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to stop this issue getting worse
and so as to not cause the tailgate to drop,
and serious injuries.
The motorised operation of the tailgate can
be activated or deactivated by selecting
"Motorised tailgate" in the Driving menu of
the touch screen.
Motorised tailgate
General points
The motorised tailgate must only be operated
with the vehicle stationary.
Check that there is enough space to allow for
the movement of the motorised tailgate.
Never introduce a finger in the locking
system of the motorised tailgate – Risk of
a serious injury!
Safety anti-pinch
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle
detection system that automatically interrupts
and reverses its movement by a few degrees to
allow the obstacle to be cleared.
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
active at the end of the closing travel (around
1 cm from completely closed).
49
2
Acc ess
To avoid the risk of injury through pinching
or trapping, before and during operation of
the motorised tailgate:
- ensure that there is no person close to
the rear of the vehicle,
- monitor the activity of your rear
passengers, particularly any children.
Bicycle carrier/Towing device
The motorised tailgate is not designed to
support a bicycle carrier.
When installing a bicycle carrier on a towing
device with connection of a cable to the towing
socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate
will be automatically deactivated.
If using a towing device or bicycle carrier
not approved by CITROËN, it is essential
to deactivate the motorised operation of the
tailgate.
Operation
Motorised opening
Tailgate opening using the
electronic key/remote control (A)
F Hold the remote control button
down for several seconds.
or
Tailgate opening using the
"Keyless Entry and Starting"
system (B)
F Press control B on the tailgate with the
electronic key within the coverage zone.
When selective locking is activated, the
electronic key must be close to the rear of
the vehicle.
Opening the tailgate
F After the vehicle is fully unlocked, press
control B on the tailgate.
The command is confirmed by an audible beep.
By default, the tailgate opens fully or to the
stored position.
There are several ways of operating the
motorised tailgate:
- using the electronic key of the Keyless Entry
and Starting system (A),
- using the exterior tailgate control (B),
- using the interior tailgate control (C),
- with a kicking movement, if your vehicle has
the hands-free function.
For more information on the Hands-free
tailgate, refer to the corresponding section.
50
Acc ess
At any point, it is possible to interrupt the
operation of the tailgate:
Repeated opening and closing of the
motorised tailgate can cause overheating
of its electric motor, after which opening
and closing will not be possible.
Allow the motor to cool down for ten
minutes before operating the tailgate
again.
If you are unable to wait, operate it
manually.
Detection of obstacles
If an obstacle (person or object) is
encountered, the anti-pinch system stops the
closing movement and raises the tailgate by
a few centimetres to clear the obstacle.
Memorising an opening
position
To cancel the memorised position:
- stop the tailgate in an intermediate position,
- press button C or the exterior control B for
more than 3 seconds.
Cancellation of the memorised position is
confirmed by an audible signal.
Manual operation
Motorised closing
There are two options:
F Press and release the exterior control B.
or
The motorised tailgate has a safety anti-
pinch feature which interrupts the closing
movement if there is something in the way.
F Press button C and release it.
- by pressing one of these
two buttons,
or
- by pressing the exterior
control B.
After a movement is interrupted, pressing
one of the controls again restarts the
movement, unless you press the remote
control button, which only controls
opening.
Where height is restricted (garage with a low
ceiling, etc.) it is possible to limit the opening
angle of the motorised tailgate.
This memorisation is done as follows:
- open the tailgate to the desired position,
- press button C or the exterior control B for
more than 3 seconds.
Memorisation of the maximum opening position
of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal.
The motorised tailgate can be opened and
closed manually, even if motorised operation is
activated.
However, any manual operation must be done
with the tailgate first stopped.
During manual operations to open or close
the motorised tailgate, you will no longer be
assisted by the struts. Resistance to opening
and closing is therefore entirely normal.
Reinitialising the motorised
tailgate
This operation is necessary where there is no
movement – after detection of an obstacle,
reconnecting or recharging the battery, etc.
F Open the tailgate manually, if necessary.
F Fully close the tailgate manually.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or qualified workshop.
51
2
Acc ess
Precautions in use
In wintry conditions
In the event of an accumulation of snow
on the tailgate, clear the snow before
commanding a motorised opening of the
tailgate.
The formation of ice can block the tailgate
and prevent its opening: wait until the ice
melts with the heating of the passenger
compartment.
When washing
When washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, lock your vehicle to avoid the
risk of unexpected opening.
Back-up control
To manually unlock the boot in the event of
a battery or central locking failure.
Unlocking
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the
lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the boot.
F Move the latch to the left.
Hands-free tailgate
To enable you to open or close the tailgate
while your hands are full, the motorised tailgate
may be fitted with the hands-free function.
For more information on the Motorised
tailgate, refer to the corresponding section.
"Hands-free" opening
Making another kicking movement with your
foot below the bumper while the tailgate is
opening interrupts the movement. A third kicking
movement reverses the direction of movement.
If the vehicle is locked, it unlocks before
the tailgate opens.
F If your hands are full, with the remote
control on you in the recognition zone A,
make a kicking movement with your foot
below the rear bumper.
Flashing of the direction indicator lamps and
a beeping sound confirm the request.
The tailgate opens to the stored position.
52
Acc ess
Ensure that you are steady on your feet
before making the kicking movement
below the rear bumper.
Take care not to touch the exhaust
system, which may be hot – Risk of burns!
"Hands-free" closing
F If your hands are full, with the remote
control on you in the recognition zone A,
make a kicking movement with your foot
below the rear bumper.
Flashing of the direction indicator lamps and
a beeping sound confirm the request.
Making another kicking movement with your
foot below the bumper while the tailgate is
closing interrupts the movement. A third kicking
movement reverses the direction of movement.
Deactivation
By default, hands-free access is activated.
This function can be activated or deactivated
by selecting "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" in
the Driving menu of the touch screen.
Automatic locking
To lock the vehicle when the tailgate closes
using a kicking movement, activate "Hands-
free tailgate access self-locking" in the
Driving menu of the touch screen.
Recommendations related
to the Hands-Free Tailgate
Access function
If several kicking movements to operate the
tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds
before trying again.
If it does not work, check that the electronic key
is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic
interference (e.g. smartphone).
The function may be deactivated or affected if
there is rain or snow.
The function may not work correctly with
a prosthetic leg.
- you are washing your vehicle,
- your vehicle is being serviced,
- you are accessing the spare wheel
(depending on version).
To avoid such operating problems, keep the
electronic key away from the recognition zone
or deactivate the Hands-Free Tailgate Access
function.
After installing a towing device, it is
essential to contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop so that it is taken
into account by the detection system.
Otherwise, there is a risk of malfunction of
the Hands-Free Tailgate Access function.
Ensure that no object or person might
prevent the correct opening or closing of
the tailgate.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the tailgate.
In some circumstances, the tailgate may open
or close by itself, particularly if:
- you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
- you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
- you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
carrier,
- you place or lift something behind the
vehicle,
- an animal approaches the rear bumper,
53
2
Acc ess
Alarm
System which protects and provides a deterrent
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
following types of monitoring:
- Exterior perimeter:
The system checks whether the vehicle is
opened. The alarm is triggered if anyone
tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet.
- Interior volumetric:
The system checks for any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks
a window, enters the passenger
compartment or moves inside the vehicle.
Self-protection function: the system
checks for the putting out of service of its
own components. The alarm is triggered
if the siren's battery, button or wiring is
disconnected or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Activation
F Lock the vehicle using the
remote control.
or
F Lock the vehicle using the " Keyless Entry
and Starting" system.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator
lamp for the button flashes once per second
and the direction indicators come on for about
2 seconds.
After an instruction to lock the vehicle using
the remote control or the " Keyless Entry
and Starting" system, the exterior perimeter
monitoring is activated after 5 seconds, the
interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds.
If an opening (door, boot, bonnet, etc.) is
incorrectly closed, the vehicle is not locked
but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be
activated after 45 seconds at the same time as
the interior volumetric monitoring.
Deactivation
F Press one of the remote control unlocking
buttons.
or
F Unlock the vehicle with the " Keyless Entry
and Starting" system.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
indicator lamp for the button goes off and the
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
When the vehicle automatically locks itself
again (as happens if a door or boot is not
opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
the monitoring system is automatically
reactivated.
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
F
Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
Short press
Long press
54
Acc ess
Deactivating the interior
volumetric monitoring
F Switch off the ignition and within ten
seconds, press the alarm button until the
indicator lamp is on continuously.
- leaving a window partially open,
- washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel,
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by ship.
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system.
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
activated: the indicator lamp for the button
flashes once per second.
To take effect, this deactivation must be carried
out each time the ignition is switched off.
Reactivating the interior
volumetric monitoring
F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring
by unlocking the vehicle using the remote
control or the " Keyless Entry and Starting"
system.
The indicator lamp for the button goes off.
F Reactivate the full alarm system by locking
the vehicle using the remote control or the
"Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
The indicator lamp for the button flashes once
per second again.
Triggering of the alarm
This results in sounding the siren and flashing
the direction indicators for thirty seconds.
The monitoring functions remain active until
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control or the " Keyless Entry and Starting"
system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
for the button informs you that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
Failure of the remote
control
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
F Unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to
the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
F Open the door; this sets off the alarm.
F Upon switching on the ignition the alarm
stops. The indicator lamp for the button
goes off.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
(integral to the remote control) in the driver's
door lock.
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed
illumination of the indicator lamp for the button
indicates a fault with the system.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Automatic activation
(Depending on the country where the product
is sold.)
The system is activated automatically 2 minutes
after the last door or the boot is closed.
F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, first press the unlocking button
on the remote control or unlock the vehicle
using the " Keyless Entry and Starting"
system.
55
2
Acc ess
Electric windows
Manual operation
To open or close the window, press or pull the
switch gently. The window stops as soon as the
control is released.
Automatic operation
To open or close the window, press or pull
switch fully: the window opens or closes
completely when the switch is released.
Pressing the switch again stops the movement
of the window.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
In the event of unwanted opening of the
window on closing, press the switch until the
window opens completely, then pull the switch
immediately until the window closes. Continue
to hold the switch for approximately one second
after the window has closed.
The anti-pinch safety function is not active
during this system activation operation.
Deactivating the rear
controls for the rear
windows
For the safety of your children, press
switch 5 to prevent operation of the
rear windows irrespective of their
positions.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompanied by a message confirming
activation. It remains on, as long as the
deactivation is in place.
Use of the rear electric windows from the
driver's controls remains possible.
Reinitialisation of the
electric windows
Following reconnection of the battery, the anti-
pinch safety function must be reinitialised.
The anti-pinch safety function is not active
during these operations:
For each window:
- Lower the window fully, then raise it, it will
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time
the control is pressed. Repeat the operation
until the window closes completely,
- Continue to pull the switch for at least one
second after reaching the window closed
position.
1. Left-hand front.
2. Right-hand front.
3. Right-hand rear.
4. Left-hand rear.
5. Deactivate the electric window switches
located at the rear seats.
The electric window switches remain
operational for approximately 45 seconds after
switching off the ignition.
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windows will not operate. To reactivate them,
switch the ignition on again.
56
Acc ess
In the event of contact (pinching) during
operation of the windows, you must
reverse the movement of the window. To
do this, press the switch concerned.
When operating the passenger electric
window switches, the driver must ensure
that nothing is preventing correct closing
of the windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
Be aware of passengers or other persons
present when closing the windows using
the electronic key or the " Keyless Entry
and Starting" system.
3
57
Ease of use and comfort
Front seats
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats
or jamming the seat if large objects are
placed on the floor behind the seat.
Manual adjustments
Longitudinal
F Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
When your seat is at the correct distance, move
it forwards and backwards slightly without
using the control bar to ensure the seat is
properly locked.
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
necessary to obtain the position required.
Driver seat backrest angle
F Turn the knob to adjust the backrest.
Correct driving position
For safety reasons, seat adjustments
must only be made when the vehicle is
stationary.
Before taking to the road and to make the most of the
ergonomic layout of the instruments and controls,
carry out these adjustments in the following order:
- the height of the head restraint,
- the seat backrest angle,
- the seat cushion height,
- the longitudinal position of the seat,
- the height and reach of the steering wheel,
- the rear view mirror and door mirrors.
Once these adjustments have been made,
check that the instrument panel can be
viewed correctly from your driving position.
Seat cushion height
58
Ease of use and comfort
Passenger seat backrest angle
F Pull the control upwards or turn the knob to
adjust the backrest.
When the backrest is correctly inclined, release
the control.
To prevent the backrest from suddenly
folding forwards and hitting you, hold the
backrest with your back or hand while you
move the control.
Table position for the front
passenger seat backrest
Check that no object, either on or
underneath the seat, could hinder its
movement.
F Place the head restraint in the low position,
raise the armrest and fold the tray on the
back of the seat.
F Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest
forwards.
To return to the normal position, guide the
backrest backwards until it locks into place.
This position, together with that of the rear
seats, allows you to transport long objects
inside the vehicle.
In this position, the backrest can support
a maximum load of 30 kg.
Electric adjustments
To avoid discharging the battery, carry out
these adjustments with the engine running.
Longitudinal (driver seat)
F Push the control forwards or backwards to
slide the seat.
Backrest angle
F Tilt the control forwards or backwards to
adjust the angle of the seat backrest.
3
59
Ease of use and comfort
Storing driving positions
Two positions can be stored and recalled, using
the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
Storing a position using buttons
M/1/2
F Switch on the ignition.
F Adjust your seat.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or
2 within four seconds.
An audible signal indicates that the position has
been stored.
Storing a new position overwrites the previous
position.
Recalling a stored position
F With the ignition on or the engine
running, press button 1 or 2 to recall the
corresponding position.
An audible signal indicates the completion of
the adjustment.
You can interrupt the current movement by
pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
seat controls.
A stored position cannot be recalled while
driving.
Recalling stored positions is deactivated
45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
Additional adjustments
Head restraint height
F To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
and push down on the head restraint at the
same time.
The head restraint has a frame with notches
which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety
device in case of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Removing a head restraint
F To remove the head restraint, press the lug
A and pull the head restraint upwards.
F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the
openings, keeping them in line with the seat
backrest and press the lug A at the same
time.
Cushion height and angle
F Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
F Tilt the front part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the desired angle.
System which registers the electrical settings
of the driver's seat.
60
Ease of use and comfort
Relax head restraints
Depending on the version, you can fold the
sides for greater comfort.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be fitted and correctly
adjusted.
Electric lumbar adjustment
F Press the control to obtain the desired
lumbar support.
Massage function
Activation/Deactivation
F Press this button.
Its indicator lamp comes on and the
massage function is activated for
a period of 1 hour.
During this time, massage is performed in
6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage
followed by 4 minutes of break).
After one hour the function is deactivated, the
indicator lamp goes off.
Deactivate the massage function by pressing
this button, its indicator lamp goes off.
This function provides a lumbar massage to the
occupants in front; it only operates when the
engine is running as well as in STOP mode of
the Stop & Start system.
Adjustment of intensity
Press this button to choose one of
the two available levels of massage
intensity.
Electric leg rest
Passenger seat with manual adjustments
F Press the front or rear part of the control to
unfold or fold the leg rest.
The movement stops when your release the
control.
Electric passenger seat
3
61
Ease of use and comfort
Heated seats
F Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and
select the level of heating required:
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.
With the engine running, the front seats can be
heated separately.
Do not use the function when the seat
is not occupied.
Reduce the intensity of the heating as
soon as possible.
When the seat and passenger
compartment have reached an
adequate temperature, you can stop
the function; reducing the consumption
of electrical current reduces fuel
consumption.
Prolonged use at the highest setting is
not recommended for those with sensitive
skin.
There is a risk of burns for people whose
perception of heat is impaired (illness,
taking medication, for example).
There is a risk of overheating the system if
material with insulating properties is used,
such as cushions or seat covers.
Do not use the function:
- if wearing damp clothing,
- if child seats are fitted.
To avoid breaking the heating element in
the seat:
- do not place heavy objects on the seat,
- do not kneel or stand on the seat,
- do not place sharp objects on the seat,
- do not spill liquids onto the seat.
To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
- do not use liquid products for cleaning
the seat,
- never use the heating function when
the seat is damp.
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to
unfold or fold the leg rest.
The movement stops when your release the
control.
Prior to handling the leg rest, make sure
that nothing obstructs the movement.
62
Ease of use and comfort
Front armrest
Height adjustment
Second row seats
The 3 seats of the 2
nd
row are independent
and are the same width. Their backrests are
adjustable to adapt the boot load space.
F Lower the armrest completely.
F Lift it again to the desired position (low,
intermediate or high).
F Once it is in the high position, lift it to unlock
it and bring it to the low position.
Longitudinal adjustment
A. Longitudinal adjustment: lift the lever.
B. Tilt angle adjustment: pull the strap and
push the seat back.
C. Folding the seat: give a firm upward pull
on the strap to unlock the seat.
D. Folding the seat from the back: pull the
strap then push the backrest forward.
F Lift lever A, at the front of the seat cushion
and adjust the seat as required.
3
63
Ease of use and comfort
Rear head restraints
Relax head restraints
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be fitted and correctly
adjusted.
Flat floor
Folding the seat
F Place the seats in the maximum rearwards
longitudinal position.
The rear head restraints are removable and
have two positions:
- high, the position for use,
- low, the position for storage.
To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press the lug A then push the head
restraint downwards.
To remove it:
- move the head restraint to the high position,
- press the lug A while pulling the head
restraint upwards.
To replace it:
- engage the head restraint rods in the
apertures, keeping the head restraint in line
with the seat backrest.
Depending on the version, you can fold the
sides to obtain a better comfortable position.
Each seat folds down to the floor to adapt the
boot volume as required.
"Comfort" position
F Pull strap B and push the seat back.
The backrest tilts and the cushion rotates
slightly.
Returning the seat to its initial
position
F Pull strap B and push the seat forward.
Do not allow children to operate the
seats unsupervised.
64
Ease of use and comfort
From outside the vehicle
From the boot, for example when loading
F Give a firm upward pull on strap C, as
shown by the arrow, to unlock the seat;
keep pulling the strap until the seat is
completely folded. Push the backrest
slightly forward so that the backrest tilts
and folds over the cushion. The seat and
cushion fold down to the floor.
Replacing the seat
F If necessary, straighten the continuity
panels of the 2nd row of seats and lock
them.
F Raise the backrest and push it back until it
latches into place.
Before performing any operations on the
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
belts, make sure that the side belts are
properly tensioned. The central seat belt
must be put away. Secure the buckles
of the three seat belts to their anchoring
points.
Continuity panels
You can fold the second row seat(s) directly
from the boot, after having first folded the third
row seats.
F Pull strap D to unlock the desired seat and
give the backrest a slight push forward. To
prevent any damage to the mechanism,
strap D will unclip if excessive force is
applied. It is just a matter of clipping it back
into place to make the system operational
again.
Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom
of the backrest, which, once unfolded:
- allows for a continuous loading surface in
the boot, whatever the position of the seats,
- prevents objects from sliding beneath the
2nd row seats.
These continuity panels are not designed
to support a weight greater than 30 kg.
3
65
Ease of use and comfort
Getting out of the vehicle
from third row seats
Replacing the seat from
outside the vehicle, with
door open
If passengers are seated in the third row seats:
F manually push the seat and cushion back as
far as it can go; the seat does not return to
the maximum back position, leaving space
free for the third row passengers' legs,
F fold the cushion until it locks.
Make sure there is nothing on or under the
cushion of the seat you want to move.
If this system fails (lever E), the third row
passengers can also get out after having
folded the backrest of the second row
seats using strap D.
Do not let children operate the seats
unsupervised.
F Pull lever E. The seat unlocks and the
cushion comes up against the backrest.
F Keep lever E up by pushing it forwards. The
seat and cushion slide towards the front
seat.
This frees space behind the seat, allowing
the third row seat passengers to get into their
seats.
F Lift lever E. The seat unlocks and the
cushion moves up to the backrest.
F Push the backrest holding lever E upwards.
Third row seats
Concertina boards
The two rigid concertina boards, which are built
in to the vehicle, cover the two third row seats,
when these are in the folded away position.
Before moving the seats, make sure that
the trays behind the front row seats are
properly stowed.
Unlocking/Locking the continuity panels
F Before unfolding the continuity panels,
check that the 2nd row seats are moved
back as far as possible.
F Slide the latch of the continuity panel
upwards to unlock it.
F Straighten out the continuity panel, then
slide the latch downwards to lock it.
Access to third row seats
Third row seats are accessed via the second
row lateral seats.
66
Ease of use and comfort
Each of the two boards can support
a maximum load of 100 kg.
Folding the concertina
boards
Pull the strap, the 3 parts of the board fold into
concertina form.
When the third row seats are straightened,
these folded concertina boards can be left:
- either flat behind the seats,
- or in the vertical position,
thus clearing the inside of the seat as a storage
space.
Installing the seats Seat storage
F Remove the load space cover.
For more information on the Interior
fittings and particularly on the load space
cover, refer to the corresponding section.
F Straighten the continuity panels of the
second row of seats and lock them in place.
F Fold the concertina board and straighten it
vertically.
F Pull strap F, located behind the backrest
of the seat. The backrest tilts backwards
bringing the cushion. The seat locks in the
open position.
F Straighten the continuity panels of the
second row of seats and lock them in place.
F Lower the head restraints.
F Correctly position the concertina board
vertically behind the seat.
F Make sure that the seat belts of the 3
rd
row
of seats are correctly fastened to the loops
and that they do not have any creases.
F Pull strap G, located at the bottom of the
backrest of the seat. The seat is unlocked.
F Then, push the backrest slightly forwards.
The backrest tilts and folds on the cushion.
The folded seat is arranged at the back of
its storage area provided for this purpose.
F Put the concertina boards back above the
folded down seats.
3
67
Ease of use and comfort
Configuration examples
4 seats
3 seats
Transporting items
7 seats
6 seats
Transporting items
5 seats
4 seats
Before working on the seats of the third
row, straighten the rigid boards of the
seats of the second row and lock them in
place.
Do not try to fold a seat in the third row
without having opened it until the backrest
is fully locked.
Do not leave objects on the cushion or
below the cushion of the seats of the third
row, when you fold them.
Do not guide strap G when storing the
seat, your may jam your fingers.
Do not let children manipulate the seats
unsupervised.
Seat modular design and
conguration
Configuration examples
5 seats
68
Ease of use and comfort
In order to easily adapt your interior
space, you can fold all of the rear seats
individually and fold them onto the second
row floor, and beneath the floor on the
third row. This gives you a continuous load
floor up to the back of the front seats.
Folding or unfolding the seats must only
be done with the vehicle stationary.
Steering wheel adjustment
F When stationary, pull the control lever
to release the steering wheel adjustment
mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving
position.
F Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel.
As a safety measure, these adjustments
should only be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
Mirrors
Door mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking.
They can also be folded for parking in narrow
spaces.
Demisting – Defrosting
Demisting-defrosting of the door
mirrors operates with the engine
running, by switching on the heated
rear screen.
For more information on Rear screen
demist - defrost, refer to the associated
section.
Adjustment
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.
Objects seen in the mirror are in reality
closer than they appear.
Take this into account when assessing
the distance of vehicles approaching from
behind.
F Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
F Move control B in any of the four directions
to adjust.
F Return control A to the central position.
Folding
F From outside: lock the vehicle using the
electronic key or the " Keyless Entry and
Starting" system.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull
the control A from the central position
rearwards.
3
69
Ease of use and comfort
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the ground
during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.
They return to their initial position:
- a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear,
- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h),
- on switching off the engine.
This function can be activated/deactivated in
the Driving menu of the touch screen.
F Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
"Comfort" and "Mirror adaptation in
reverse".
Rear view mirror
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps from other vehicles, etc.
Manual model
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
Automatic "electrochrome" model
This system automatically and progressively
changes between day and night use by means
of a sensor measuring the light coming from the
rear of the vehicle.
In order to ensure optimum visibility during
your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens
automatically when reverse gear is
engaged.
Child surveillance mirror
If the mirrors are folded using control A,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
Unfolding
F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the
electronic key or the " Keyless Entry and
Starting" system.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull
the control A from the central position
rearwards.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
If necessary, the mirrors can be folded
manually.
With the engine running, on engaging reverse
gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
Day/night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
70
Ease of use and comfort
A child surveillance mirror is installed above the
interior mirror. This allows you to keep watch
over the passengers in the back of the vehicle
and facilitates discussion between passengers
in the front and the back without needing to
adjust the mirror and without turning around. It
can be easily folded to avoid dazzle.
Ventilation
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Air treatment
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by the
driver:
- direct arrival in the passenger compartment
(air intake),
- passage through a heating circuit (heating),
- passage through a cooling circuit (air
conditioning).
Control panel
The controls of this system are accessible in the
Air conditioning menu of the touch screen A.
The demisting/defrosting controls for the
windscreen and rear screen are located to the
left of the touch screen.
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2. Front quarter window demisting/defrosting
vents.
3. Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents.
Adjustable and closable side air vents.
4. Adjustable and closable central air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Side vents of the 2
nd
row.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells of the
second row.
8. Sunshine sensor.
3
71
Ease of use and comfort
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
In order for these systems to be fully
effective, follow the operation and
maintenance guidelines below:
F To ensure that the air is distributed
evenly, keep the external air intake
grilles at the base of the windscreen, the
nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and
the air extractor in the boot free from
obstructions.
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
located on the dashboard; this is used
for regulation of the automatic air
conditioning system.
F Operate the air conditioning system for
at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice
a month to keep it in perfect working
order.
F Ensure that the passenger compartment
filter is in good condition and have the
filter elements replaced regularly. We
recommend the use of a combined
passenger compartment filter. Thanks to
its special active additive, it contributes
to the purification of the air breathed by
the occupants and the cleanliness of
the passenger compartment (reduction
of allergic symptoms, bad odours and
greasy deposits).
If after an extended stop in sunshine,
the interior temperature is very high,
first air the passenger compartment for
a few moments.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the
passenger compartment.
The condensation created by the air
conditioning results in a discharge of water
under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning systems
only work when the engine is running.
To maintain a comfortable temperature
in the passenger compartment, you may
temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
system.
For more information on Stop & Start,
refer to the corresponding section.
F To ensure correct operation of the
air conditioning system, you are also
advised to have it checked regularly as
recommended in the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide.
F If the system does not produce cold air,
switch it off and contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on a steep
gradient in high temperatures, switching off
the air conditioning increases the available
engine power and so improves the towing
ability.
To avoid the windows misting up and
deterioration in the quality of the air:
- do not drive for too long with the
ventilation switched off.
- do not keep air recirculation set for an
extended period.
72
Ease of use and comfort
Heating
The heating only operates when the engine is
running.
Press the Air conditioning menu button to
display the system controls page.
1. Temperature adjustment.
2. Air flow adjustment.
3. Air distribution adjustment.
4. Air intake/Air recirculation.
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of the arrows 1, or move the
slider from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your liking.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to
decrease or increase the speed of the air
booster fan.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased.
By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
Avoid driving for too long without
ventilation – risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality!
Air distribution adjustment
You can vary the air distribution in the
passenger compartment using the buttons 3.
Windscreen.
Footwells.
Central and side vents.
Illumination of the button indicates the
presence of pulsed air in the specified
direction.
For a uniform distribution of air in the
passenger compartment, the three buttons can
be activated simultaneously.
Air intake/Air recirculation
For more information on Recirculation of
interior air, refer to the corresponding section.
Dual-zone temperature-
regulated manual air
conditioning
The manual air conditioning operates with the
engine running.
The temperature at the nozzles and vents
is regulated by the system according to the
temperature in the passenger compartment
and the temperature setting.
Press the Air conditioning menu button to
display the system controls page.
3
73
Ease of use and comfort
1. Temperature adjustment on driver/
passenger side.
2. Air flow adjustment.
3. Air distribution adjustment.
4. Air intake/Air recirculation.
5. Air conditioning on/off.
Temperature adjustment
The driver and front passenger can each set
the temperature independently of one another.
F Press one of the arrows 1 to decrease (blue)
or increase (red) the value.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
It is recommended that you avoid a difference
of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to
decrease or increase the speed of the air
booster fan.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased.
By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
Avoid driving for too long without
ventilation – risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality!
Air distribution adjustment
You can vary the air distribution in the
passenger compartment using the buttons 3.
Windscreen.
Footwells.
Central and side vents.
Illumination of the button indicates the presence
of pulsed air in the specified direction.
Air intake/Air recirculation
For more information on Recirculation of
interior air, refer to the corresponding section.
Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning is designed to operate
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
F Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air
conditioning system.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioning function is activated.
The air conditioning does not operate when
the air flow adjustment is inhibited.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
use recirculation of the interior air for a few
moments. Then return to the intake of
exterior air.
Switching off the air conditioning may result
in some discomfort (humidity, condensation).
For a uniform distribution of air in the
passenger compartment, the three buttons can
be activated simultaneously.
74
Ease of use and comfort
Dual-zone automatic air
conditioning
The air conditioning operates with the engine
running, but the ventilation and its controls are
available with the ignition on.
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation
of temperature, air flow and air distribution in
the passenger compartment are automatic.
Press the button for the Air Conditioning
menu to display the page of controls for the air
conditioning system.
Temperature adjustment
The driver and front passenger can each set
the temperature independently of one another.
F Press one of the arrows 1 to decrease (blue)
or increase (red) the value.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
It is recommended that you avoid a difference
of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to
decrease or increase the speed of the fan.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased.
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
"- - -" is displayed.
Avoid driving too long without ventilation
– risk of misting and deterioration of air
quality!
Air distribution adjustment
You can vary the air distribution in the
passenger compartment using the buttons 3.
Windscreen.
Footwells.
Central and side vents.
Illumination of the button indicates the
presence of pulsed air in the specified
direction.
In AUTO mode, the three buttons are off.
Air intake/Air recirculation
For more information on Recirculation of
interior air, refer to the corresponding section.
Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning is designed to operate
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
1. Temperature adjustment on driver/
passenger side.
2. Air flow adjustment.
3. Air distribution adjustment.
4. Air intake/Air recirculation.
5. Air conditioning on/off.
6. Automatic mode.
7. Mono function.
8. Access to the secondary page.
3
75
Mode AUTO
Ease of use and comfort
F Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air
conditioning system.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioning function is activated.
The air conditioning does not operate when
the air flow adjustment is inhibited.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
use recirculation of the interior air for a few
moments. Then return to the intake of
exterior air.
Switching off the air conditioning may result
in some discomfort (humidity, condensation).
Automatic comfort
programme
F Press the "AUTO" button 6 to activate or
deactivate the automatic mode of the air
conditioning system.
The air conditioning system operates
automatically: the system manages the
temperature, air flow and air distribution in the
passenger compartment in an optimum way
according to the comfort level you have selected.
F Go to the secondary page by pressing
button 8 "OPTIONS" to adjust the automatic
comfort programme by choosing one of the
available settings.
F To change the current setting,
press the button several times
in succession to access the
desired mode:
"Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by
limiting air flow.
"Normal": offers the best compromise between
a comfortable temperature and quiet operation
(default setting).
"Fast": provides strong and effective air flow.
This setting is associated with AUTO mode
only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
the last selected setting remains.
Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO
mode if deactivated.
In cold weather with the engine cold, the
air flow is increased gradually until the
comfort setting has been reached, in order
to limit the delivery of cold air into the
passenger compartment.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort setting requested, there
is no need to alter the value displayed in
order to reach more quickly the required
level of comfort. The system automatically
corrects the temperature difference as
quickly as possible.
You can always choose to change a setting
manually. In this case, the automatic comfort
programme is deactivated.
F Press the "AUTO" button 6 to activate the
automatic comfort programme again.
"Mono" function
The comfort setting for the passenger's side
can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting
(mono-zone).
F Press the button 7 to activate/deactivate the
"Mono" function.
The function is deactivated automatically when
the passenger uses their temperature setting
buttons.
"Rear" function
This function gives rear passengers access to
the adjustment controls and enables:
- air conditioned air to be circulated by the 2
nd
row outlets,
- recirculated interior air to be circulated by
the 3
rd
row outlets,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
From the secondary page of the Air
conditioning menu:
F Press this button to activate/
deactivate the "Rear" function.
76
Ease of use and comfort
Settings for passengers in the
2nd row
Settings for passengers in the
third row
Ventilation with ignition on
function
F Turn the top dial to open or close the rear
vent.
F Turn the lower dial to decrease (to the left)
or increase (to the right) the air flow.
F Press on the vent's shutter.
F Adjust the air flow of both vents using the
dial with four positions (off, low, medium,
high).
F Direct the vent by turning the shutter.
With the ignition on, you can use the ventilation
system and access the Air conditioning menu
to control the air flow and air distribution in the
passenger compartment.
This function is available for a few minutes,
depending on the state of charge of the battery
of your vehicle.
This function does not activate the air
conditioning.
You can make use of the residual heat in the
engine to warm the passenger compartment
using the temperature setting buttons.
Recirculation of interior air
The intake of exterior air helps avoid and
eliminate misting of the windscreen and side
windows.
Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours
and fumes.
When required, this function can also be
used to speed up the heating or cooling of
the passenger compartment.
F Press button 4 to recirculate the interior air
or to permit the intake of outside air.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
recirculation function is activated, the intake of
exterior air is inhibited.
Avoid the prolonged use of interior
air recirculation – Risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality!
3
77
Ease of use and comfort
Front demist – defrost
On/Off
F Press this button to demist or defrost the
windscreen and side windows as quickly as
possible. The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
The system automatically manages the air
conditioning (depending on version), air
flow and air intake, and provides optimum
distribution towards the windscreen and side
windows.
F To switch off demisting/defrosting, press
this button again. The indicator lamp in the
button goes off.
With Stop & Start, when demisting/
defrosting has been activated, STOP
mode is not available.
Rear screen demist –
defrost
On/Off
F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear
screen and, depending on version, the door
mirrors. The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically
to prevent excessive electrical consumption.
F It is possible to stop the demisting/
defrosting operation before it is switched off
automatically by pressing this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Switch off the demisting/defrosting of
the rear screen and door mirrors as
soon as appropriate, as lower current
consumption results in reduced fuel
consumption.
Rear screen demisting/defrosting can only
be operated when the engine is running.
Fragrance diffuser
Diffuses a fragrance in the passenger
compartment from the central air vents.
Your diffuser is fitted with an empty
cartridge when your vehicle is delivered.
You therefore need to install a cartridge
before use.
Flow adjustment
F Turn button A to adjust (left to decrease,
right to increase) or stop (completely to the
left) the fragranced air flow.
The central vents must be open.
78
Ease of use and comfort
The average use per cartridge is 3 months
at the rate of one hour per day.
Removing the diffuser
Inserting the diffuser
F Push button A by turning it a quarter turn
completely to the end.
F Remove the diffuser from the dashboard
F Replace your cartridge (see "Replacing
a cartridge").
After installing or replacing the cartridge:
F put the diffuser back in its housing,
F turn it a quarter of a turn to the right.
Replacing a cartridge
The diffuser refill includes a cartridge B and its
sealed cover C.
F Remove the protective film D.
F Place the head of cartridge B on the diffuser
button A.
F Turn it a quarter turn to lock it on the button
and remove the cover.
F Insert the diffuser in its housing.
You can replace cartridges at any time and
keep the cartridges already started in their
original cover.
Diffuser button
The diffuser button A is independent of the
cartridge. The cartridges are delivered without
the button A.
The diffuser button A can only be fixed into the
central control panel with a cartridge.
Therefore always keep the button A and
a cartridge.
Depending on the country, replacement
cartridges are available online or from
CITROËN dealers, as well as any qualified
workshop.
Storage is provided for the cartridges and
covers in the glove box.
3
79
Ease of use and comfort
For safety reasons, only use the
cartridges designed for the system.
Retain the cartridge sealed covers which
serve as packaging if the cartridge is not
used.
Never refill or disassemble the cartridges.
Keep cartridges out of the reach of
children or pets.
Avoid contact with the skin or eyes.
In the event of ingestion, consult a doctor,
showing them the product packaging or
label.
Never install or remove a cartridge while
driving.
Front ttings
1. Sun visor.
2. Ticket holder.
3. Glove box.
4. Central storage.
It includes the electric and audio sockets.
5. High console with closed storage box, low
console or removable console.
6. Cup holder.
7. Door pockets.
8. Storage compartment below the steering
wheel.
(Vehicle documentation.)
Sliding sun visors
Sliding window blinds
The sliding window blinds can protect you from
brightness and sunlight. They can be adjusted
manually.
F Slide the window blind to the required
position by pushing zone A.
80
Ease of use and comfort
Do not attach or hang heavy objects on
the slide rail of the sun visor blinds.
Glove box
Depending on the equipment, it may include
a CD player.
F To open the glove box, raise the handle.
It is illuminated when the lid is opened.
It is cooled by a ventilation nozzle that can be
closed manually.
It is directly linked to your vehicle's air
conditioning system and is supplied with
fresh air whatever the setting required in the
passenger compartment.
The cooling of your glove box only functions
when the engine is running and the air
conditioning is on.
Portable console
The portable console is a removable storage
space fixed to the low centre console.
It includes a sliding flap, an open storage
compartment and two cup holders.
Taking out the portable console
Sun visor supports
The window blinds are extended via the sun
visor supports.
Fold the support downwards to avoid glare from
ahead.
In case of glare through the door windows,
release the support from its central fixing and
turn it to the side.
The supports are fitted with a locking system
on their central fixing when rolling up the
window blind. To remove or replace the
support, it must be positioned vertically.
If it is not fixed to its support, the portable
console must be stored in the boot. It
could turn into a projectile in the event of
sudden braking or serious impact.
F Pull the unlocking control located at the
front of the console.
F With one hand, lift the front part of the
console.
F With the other hand, take the rear part to
free the portable console.
3
81
AC 230V
50Hz 120W
Ease of use and comfort
Putting the portable console
back in place
Central storage
230 V/50 Hz socket
Connect only one device at a time to
the socket (no extension or multi-way
connector).
Connect only devices with class II
insulation (shown on the device).
Do not use a device with a metal case
(electric shaver,etc.).
As a safety measure, when electrical
consumption is high and when required by
the vehicle's electrical system (particular
weather conditions, electrical overload,
etc.), the current supply to the socket will be
cut off; the green indicator lamp goes off.
12 V socket
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max. power:
120 W), lift the cover and connect a suitable
adaptor.
Do not exceed the maximum power rating
of the socket (otherwise this could cause
damage to your portable device).
F Perform the steps in reversed order. Check
that the console is properly locked.
F Pull the handle and lower the lid to open the
central storage.
It is illuminated when opened.
Deactivate the lighting by pressing the button
at the top.
Depending on equipment, this may include:
- 1 x 230 V socket,
- 1 x 12 V socket,
- 1 x USB port,
- 1 x JACK socket.
A 230 V/50 Hz socket (max. power: 120 W) is
fitted in the central storage.
To use the socket:
F open the central storage,
F check that the indicator lamp is on green,
F connect your multimedia or other electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop computer,
CD-DVD player, baby food warmer, etc.).
This socket works with the engine running, as
well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start.
In the event of a fault with the socket, the green
indicator lamp flashes.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
82
Ease of use and comfort
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
JACK socket
To connect a portable device so that you
can listen to your music files via the vehicle's
speakers.
The management of the files is done using your
portable device.
For more information on Audio and
telematics and in particular the use of
this equipment, refer to the corresponding
section.
USB port
When the USB port is used, the portable
device charges automatically.
A message is displayed if the power drawn
by the portable device exceeds the current
supplied by the vehicle.
Mats
Fitting
The USB port is located in the central storage.
It allows the connection of a portable device or
a USB memory stick.
It reads the audio files which are sent to your
audio system and played via the vehicle's
speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering
mounted or touch screen controls.
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
3
83
Ease of use and comfort
Removing
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
F move the seat as far back as possible,
F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.
Retting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
F position the mat correctly,
F put on the fixings again by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to the
fixings already present in the vehicle;
these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of the
cruise control/speed limiter.
The mats approved by CITROËN have two
fixings located below the seat.
Storage boxes
Depending on equipment, there are storage
boxes located under the front seats.
Opening
F Lift the handle and lower the storage box
cover.
Do not place heavy objects in the storage
boxes.
Storage compartment
below the steering wheel
This storage below the steering wheel is used
to store the vehicle's on-board documentation.
84
Ease of use and comfort
Rear ttings
Aircraft trays
Closed tray
Open tray
These trays, fixed to the back of the front
seats, includes a recessed cup holder A and
a retaining strap B.
For security reasons, these trays retract
downwards if excessive pressure is exerted.
Individual reading lamp
Side blinds
F Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the
hook B.
Fitted to the windows in row 2, they protect the
passenger compartment from the sun's rays.
The reading lamps C may be integrated into
the backrests of the front seats, behind the
trays. They illuminate the top of the tray without
disturbing the other passengers.
They are only accessible when the tray is
lowered.
F Press the "On/Off" button to switch the
reading lamp on or off.
F Pull the tray to lower it.
F To fold the tray away, pull it up to the locking
latch.
Storage boxes
There are two storage boxes located beneath
the rear passenger footwells.
To open them, lift the cover by the notch.
3
85
Ease of use and comfort
12 V accessory socket
Do not exceed the maximum power rating
of the socket (risk of damage to your
device).
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
Boot ttings
1. Rear shelf
(see details opposite)
2. Hooks
(see details opposite)
3. Strap
4. Stowing rings
5. 12 V socket (max power: 120 Watts)
Rear shelf
To remove the shelf:
F release the two cords,
F gently lift the shelf, then remove it.
There are several ways of storing it:
- either upright behind the front seats,
- or flat on the bottom of the boot.
Hooks
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 Watts), lift the cover and connect
a suitable adaptor.
These can be used to secure shopping bags.
86
Ease of use and comfort
Boot ttings
Load space cover
Installation
The mobile flap avoids interference with
the second row passengers when the
seats are in the "comfort" position.
Removal
In 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind
the second row seats, with the third row seats
stored folded away.
In 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the
third row seats.
F Position the left and right ends of the roller
in cut-outs A, with the mobile flap at the
front.
F Pull out the roller until it reaches the boot
pillars.
F Insert the guides of the roller into the rails in
pillars B.
F Remove the guides of the roller from the
rails in pillars B.
F Guide the roller as it reels in.
F Unlock the roller by pressing one of the
handles located at the ends of the roller
bracket.
1. Load space cover
2. Concertina boards
3. 12 V socket (max power: 120 Watts)
4. Armrest with cup holder and storage
compartment
5. Storage area of the load space cover
6. Open storage compartment
7. Low stowing rings
3
87
Ease of use and comfort
To fold the 3
rd
row seats with the roller stored at
the back, it is necessary to raise the concertina
boards in order to give access to the seat
unlocking controls (red straps).
When sharp deceleration occurs, objects
placed on the load space cover can turn
into projectiles.
Courtesy lamps
Front – rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
- when you unlock the vehicle,
- when the electronic key is removed from the
reader,
- when opening a door,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
It will only be possible to switch on the door
mirror spotlamps if the courtesy lamp is in this
position.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
Storage behind the 3
rd
row seats
F Make sure that the 3
rd
row seats are folded.
F Fold the first two concertina boards.
F Position the roller in the space located
above the armrest, side by side, tilting it
slightly.
F Slide the roller to the stop position, until it
reaches the notches arranged at the back of
the boot, with the two hinges facing down.
F Unfold the third row seats.
The folded concertina boards can be placed in
the horizontal or upright position.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Front map reading lamps
3. Rear courtesy lamp
4. Rear map reading lamps
88
Ease of use and comfort
Front – rear map reading
lamps
F With the ignition on, operate the
corresponding switch.
Take care not to put anything in contact
with the courtesy lamps.
In "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
time varies according to the circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
Interior ambient lighting
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Switching on
Footwell lighting
The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Switching on
Its operation is the same as the courtesy
lamps. The lamps come on when one of the
doors is opened.
At night, the dashboard, centre console and
courtesy lamps come on automatically once
the sidelamps are lit.
The interior ambient lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
off.
The interior ambient lighting can be activated or
deactivated in the Driving menu by selecting
the "Vehicle settings" tab, then "Comfort"
and "Mood lighting".
3
89
Ease of use and comfort
Panoramic glass sunroof
It has an electrically-controlled blind.
Opening/closing the roof
blind
F Turn control A to begin sliding the roof blind
to the desired position (positions 1 to 4).
F To close the roof blind, turn control A to
position 0.
Safety anti-pinch
This blind has an anti-pinch function. At the end
of its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle while
closing, it stops and moves back slightly.
If the blind encounters an obstacle, you should
reverse the movement by using the control.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the blind correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the blind.
Reinitalisation
In the event of a failure or battery disconnection
while the blind is moving or soon after it
stops, the safety anti-pinch function must be
reinitialised:
F put the blind in the closed position,
F press the button B for about two seconds.
90
Lighting and visibility
Lighting control stalk
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
If one or more lamps fails, a message
asks you to check the lamp or lamps
concerned.
Driving abroad
Halogen headlamps
If planning to use your vehicle in a country
that drives on the other side of the road,
the dipped beam headlamps must be
adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming
drivers. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Xenon headlamps
The design of the dipped beam headlamps
allows, without modification, driving in
a country that drives on the other side
of the road to the country in which your
vehicle was sold.
Main lighting
Without AUTO lighting
With AUTO lighting
Selection of main lighting mode
Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with
the marking.
Lighting off (ignition off)/Daytime
running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Daytime running lamps/Dipped
beam/Main beam.
Sidelamps.
Dipped or main beam headlamps.
Headlamp dipping
Pull the stalk towards you to switch between
dipped and main beam headlamps or to
activate automatic headlamp dipping.
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash"), for as long as
the stalk is kept pulled.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is switched on.
91
4
Lighting and visibility
Foglamps
They operate with the dipped and main beam
headlamps.
With rear foglamps only
Rear foglamps
F Turn the sensor ring forwards to switch on
the foglamps.
F Turn the sensor ring backwards to switch off
the foglamps.
If the dipped beam headlamps are
switched off manually, the rear foglamps
also switch off.
With front and rear foglamps
Front and rear foglamps
Turn and release the ring:
F once forwards to switch on the front
foglamps,
F forwards a second time to switch on the rear
foglamps.
If the lights are switched off automatically or
the dipped beam headlamps are switched off
manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain
on.
F Turn the ring backwards to switch off the
foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
Opening the tailgate prevents the
foglamps lighting up.
Opening the tailgate when the lamps are
on switches them off automatically along
with the indicator lamp in the instrument
panel. On closing the tailgate, they do not
light up automatically: it will be necessary
to use the control.
The sidelamps and the rear direction
indicators are situated on the tailgate.
During lighting, the opening of the tailgate
provokes the automatic switching of these
lamps towards the fitted lamps in the rear
bumpers to maintain the safety of the
vehicle.
F once backwards to switch off the rear
foglamps,
F backwards a second time to switch off the
front foglamps.
92
Lighting and visibility
In good or rainy weather, by both day
and night, the front foglamps and the
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams may
dazzle other drivers. They should only be
used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, it is your
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
and dipped headlamps manually as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Switch off the front and rear foglamps
when they are no longer necessary.
Switching off of the lighting when the
ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of the
lighting turns off immediately, except for
dipped beam headlamps if automatic
guide-me-home lighting is activated.
Switching on the lighting after the
ignition is switched off
To reactivate the lighting control stalk,
rotate ring A to the 0 position – lamps off,
then to the desired position.
On opening the driver's door a temporary
audible signal warns the driver that the
lighting is on.
It will go off automatically after a period of
time that depends on the state of charge
in battery (entering energy economy
mode).
Direction indicators (flashers)
F Left: lower the lighting control stalk passing
the point of resistance.
F Right: raise the lighting control stalk passing
the point of resistance.
Three ashes
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will flash
3 times.
Parking lamps
Vehicle side marking by illumination of the
sidelamps on the traffic side only.
F Depending on version, within one minute
of switching off the ignition, operate the
lighting control stalk up or down depending
on the traffic side (for example, when
parking on the right, push the lighting
control stalk downwards; the left-hand
sidelamps come on).
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
illumination of the corresponding direction
indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
93
4
Lighting and visibility
Guide-me-home headlamps
Manual
Activation
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting control stalk.
F Another "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Deactivation
Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
automatically at the end of a given period of time.
Automatic
With the "Automatic headlamp illumination"
function activated (lighting control stalk
in the AUTO position), under low ambient
light, the dipped beam headlamps come on
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Activation, deactivation and the duration of the
guide-me-home lighting are set in the touch
screen's Driving menu.
Select "Guide-me-home lighting" to activate
or deactivate the function.
To set the duration, select the icon of the
"Guide-me-home lighting" function.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.
When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and
a low level of ambient light is detected by the
sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver. They can also come
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to
a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed in
the instrument panel accompanied
by an audible signal and/or
a message.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may
detect sufficient light. In this case, the
lighting will not come on automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
integrated with the rain sensor and located
at the top of the windscreen behind the
rear view mirror; the associated functions
would no longer be controlled.
Front daytime running
lamps (LEDs)
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
94
Lighting and visibility
Switching on
When the courtesy lamp is in this
position, the spotlamps come on
automatically:
- when you use the remote control to locate
the vehicle.
Switching off
They go off automatically after 30 seconds.
Exterior welcome lighting
The remote switching on of the lighting makes
your approach to the vehicle easier in poor
light. It is activated when the lighting control
stalk is in the "AUTO" position and the level of
light detected by the sunshine sensor is low.
Switching on
F Press the open padlock on
the remote control or one of
the front door handles with the
"Keyless Entry and Starting"
system.
The dipped beam headlamps and the
sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also
unlocked.
Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches off
automatically after a set time, when the ignition
is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
Programming
Door mirror spotlamps
They come on automatically when the engine
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in
position "0" or "AUTO".
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
these illuminate:
- the zones facing the driver's and
passenger's doors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearward of the front doors.
- when you unlock the vehicle,
-
when removing the electronic key from the reader,
- when opening a door,
The activation, deactivation and choice of
welcome lighting duration are done in the
Driving menu of the touch screen.
Select "Welcome lighting" on the "Vehicle
settings" tab.
Use the arrows or the slider to adjust the
lighting duration.
Automatic headlamp
dipping
System which automatically changes between
dipped and main beam according to the
exterior light level and the traffic conditions,
using a camera located at the top of the
windscreen.
This system is a driving aid.
The driver remains responsible for the
vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
prevailing conditions of light, visibility,
traffic and observation of driving and
vehicle regulations.
The system will be operational as soon as
you have exceeded 16 mph (25 km/h).
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h),
the system no longer operates.
95
4
Lighting and visibility
Activation/Deactivation
F Turn the lighting control stalk
ring to the "AUTO" position.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab then "Automatic headlamp
dip".
Operation
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if
the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of
the main beam headlamps:
- dipped beam is kept on, these
indicator lamps come on in the
instrument panel.
If the ambient light level is very low and the
traffic conditions permit:
- main beam comes on
automatically: these indicator
lamps come on in the instrument
panel.
The system is deactivated when you switch on
the foglamps or when the system detects thick
fog.
When you switch off the foglamps or as soon
as the vehicle leaves the area of thick fog, the
function reactivates automatically.
This indicator lamp goes off while
the function is deactivated.
Pause
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
beam, the driver can take over at any time.
F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function
and the system changes to "automatic
illumination of headlamps" mode:
- if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam"
indicator lamps were on, the system
changes to main beam,
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator
lamps were on, the system changes to
dipped beam.
96
Lighting and visibility
To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps
again.
The system may suffer interference or not
work correctly:
- under poor visibility conditions (snow,
heavy rain, etc.),
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of
the camera,
- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective
signs.
When the system detects thick fog, it
temporarily deactivates the function.
The system is not able to detect:
- road users that do not have their own
lighting, such as pedestrians,
- vehicles whose lighting is obscured
(for example: vehicles running behind
a safety barrier on a motorway),
- vehicles at the top or bottom of
a steep slope, on winding roads, on
crossroads.
Clean the windscreen regularly,
particularly the area in front of the camera.
The internal surface of the windscreen can
also become misted around the camera.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
conceal the detection camera.
Clean the front bumper, especially around
the radar, removing mud, snow, etc.
Headlamp adjustment
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the headlamp beams should be adjusted
for height according to the vehicle's load.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. Intermediate setting.
1. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. Driver + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. 5 people + maximum authorised load in
the boot.
The initial setting is position 0.
Cornering lighting
If your vehicle is equipped with it, this system
makes use of the beam from a front foglamp
to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the
main or dipped beam headlamps are on and
the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
(urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking
manoeuvres, etc.).
97
4
Lighting and visibility
with cornering lighting
without cornering lighting
Switching on
This system starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Switching off
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
The cornering lighting can be activated or
deactivated in the Driving menu.
F Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
"Driving lighting" and "Directional
headlamps".
Directional lighting
When the dipped or main beams are on, this
function allows the light beam to better follow
the road.
Associated with xenon lamps, this function
improves the quality of your lighting while
cornering.
The system does not operate:
- when stationary or at very low speeds,
- when reverse gear is engaged.
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Operating fault
If a fault occurs, these warning
lamps are displayed on the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message.
98
Lighting and visibility
Wiper control stalk
Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions
that can be configured:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or
frost present on the windscreen, around
the wiper arms and blades and the
windscreen seal, before operating the
wipers.
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold
conditions, ensure that the wiper blades
are not stuck to the windscreen before
operating the wipers.
Manual controls
Without AUTO wiping
With AUTO wiping
Windscreen wipers
The front windscreen wiper system is
fitted with a safety device that inhibits its
function when detecting an obstacle such
as ice or snow.
The directional lighting can be activated or
deactivated in the touch screen.
In the Driving menu, select the "Vehicle
settings" tab, then "Driving lighting" and
"Directional headlamps".
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The windscreen wipers are controlled directly
by the driver.
Wiping speed selection control: raise or lower
the stalk to the desired position.
Fast wiping (heavy rain).
Normal wiping (moderate rain).
Intermittent wiping (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle).
Off.
Single wipe (press downwards or
pull the stalk briefly towards you,
then release).
or
Automatic wiping (press down,
then release).
Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
towards you).
99
4
Lighting and visibility
Automatic windscreen
wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically
once rain is detected (sensor behind the
rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the
intensity of the rain without any action on the
part of the driver.
Switching on
Give a short downwards push to the
control stalk.
A wiping cycle confirms that the
instruction has been accepted.
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and a message is
displayed.
Switching off
Give the control stalk another brief
push downwards or place the control
stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).
This indicator lamp goes off in the instrument
panel and a message is displayed.
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen
wipers must be reactivated by pushing the
control stalk downwards, if the ignition has
been off for more than one minute.
Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittent mode.
Have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, combined
with the sunshine sensor and located at
the top centre of the windscreen, behind
the rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wipers when using an automatic car wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until
the windscreen is completely clear of
ice before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.
Rear wiper
In case of snow or hard frost, deactivate
the automatic rear wiper.
Rear wiper selection ring:
Off.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation if the windscreen wiper
is operating.
This function can be activated or deactivated in
the Driving menu.
Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
"Comfort" and "Rear wiper in reverse".
In the event of snow or hard frost or
if a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towing
device, deactivate the automatic rear
wiper via the vehicle parameters menu.
100
Lighting and visibility
F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. The
screenwash and then the wiper operate for
a fixed duration.
A few moments after releasing the screenwash
control, there is one last wipe of the screen to
wipe away any excess.
Washer jet adjustment
Headlamp wash
Front screenwash and
headlamp wash
Screenwash and washer jets
The headlamp washers operate while the
vehicle is moving and the dipped beams are
on. However, to reduce the consumption of
the screenwash fluid, the headlamp washers
only operate with every seventh use of the
screenwash or every 25 miles (40 km) during
a given journey.
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
This maintenance position allows you to
release the front windscreen wiper blades in
order to clean their rubber inserts or to replace
the blades. It can also be useful in winter to
release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
F In the minute following ignition switch-off,
any operation of the wiper control stalk will
position the wiper blades vertically.
When the system is no longer powered, at least
one minute after the ignition is switched off, it is
possible to move the arms manually.
F To park the wiper blades again, gently fold
the arms onto the windscreen, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper
blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain cardboard
on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of wear.
The arms must only be replaced by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The front screenwash includes a washer jet
height adjustment device.
If you wish to change the factory setting, turn
the screw of each washer jet anticlockwise,
towards the "+" to raise the jet or clockwise,
towards the "-", to lower it.
101
5
Safety
General safety
recommendations
Labels are affixed in different locations on
your vehicle. They include safety warnings
and vehicle identification information. Do
not remove them: they are an integral part
of your vehicle.
For any work on your vehicle, use
a qualified workshop that has the technical
information, skills and equipment required,
all of which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.
Depending on country regulations, some
safety equipment may be compulsory:
high visibility safety vests, warning
triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit,
mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc.
We draw your attention to the following
points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories not approved by
CITROËN may cause excessive
current consumption and faults and
failures with the electrical system of
your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN
dealer for information on the range of
recommended accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to
the diagnostic socket, used for the
vehicle's electronic systems, is
reserved strictly for CITROËN dealers
or qualified workshops, equipped
with the special tools required (risk
of malfunctions of the vehicle's
electronic systems that could cause
breakdowns or serious accidents).
The manufacturer cannot be held
responsible if this advice is not
followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not
intended or authorised by CITROËN
or carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined by
the manufacturer will result in the
suspension of the legal and contractual
warranties.
Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
transmitter, you must contact a CITROËN
dealer for the specifications of compatible
transmitters (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/104/EC).
Hazard warning lamps
F When you press this red button, all four
direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
102
Safety
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically when you next
accelerate.
F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Horn
F Press the central part of the steering wheel.
Emergency or assistance
call
Localised Emergency Call
** According to the geographic coverage of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and Telematic
services is available from dealers or on the
website for your country.
In an emergency, press
this button for more than
2 seconds.
The flashing LED and the
voice message confirm that
the call has been made to the
"Localised Emergency Call"
call centre*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request; the LED goes off.
The LED remains on (without flashing) when
communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
"Localised Emergency Call" immediately
locates your vehicle and contacts you in
your own language**, and – if necessary –
requests that relevant emergency services be
dispatched**. In countries where the service is
not available, or when the locating service has
been expressly declined, the call is sent directly
to the emergency services (112) without the
vehicle location.
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made
automatically and independently of the
deployment of any airbags.
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on, the indicator
lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
* In accordance with the general conditions
of use for the service available from dealers
and subject to technological and technical
limitations.
103
5
Safety
The system's fault does not prevent the
vehicle from being driven.
Localised Assistance Call
** According to the geographic coverage of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
Press this button for more
than 2 seconds to request
assistance if the vehicle breaks
down.
A voice message confirms that the call has
been made**.
Immediately pressing this button again cancels
the request.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
message.
Geolocation
To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press
the "Localised Emergency Call" and "Localised
Assistance Call" buttons again, followed by
a press on "Localised Assistance Call" to
confirm.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the
CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to
have a dealer check the configuration of
these services and, if desired, modify it to
suit your wishes. In a multilingual country,
configuration is possible in the official
national language of your choice.
For technical reasons and, in particular, to
improve the quality of Telematic services
to customers, the manufacturer reserves
the right to carry out updates to the
vehicle's on-board telematic system.
If the indicator lamp lights up continuously red:
there is a system fault.
If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the
back-up battery.
In either case, emergency and assistance calls
may not function.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
The list of countries covered and of Telematic
services is available from dealers or on the
website for your country.
You can deactivate geolocation by
simultaneously pressing the "Localised
Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance
Call" buttons, followed by pressing "Localised
Assistance Call" to confirm.
If you benefit from the Citroën Connect
Box offer with the SOS and assistance
pack included, there are additional
services available to you in your personal
space, via the website for your country.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
Electronic stability control integrating the
following systems:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance (EBA),
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction
control,
- dynamic stability control (DSC).
104
Safety
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
These systems improve the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking
and contribute towards improved control in
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
surfaces.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The EBFD system manages the braking
pressure wheel by wheel.
Emergency braking assistance
(EBA)
In an emergency, this system enables you to
reach the optimum braking pressure more
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
distance.
It is triggered in relation to the speed at which
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by
a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and
an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
This system (also known as Traction Control)
optimises traction in order to limit wheel slip by
acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and
on the engine. It also improves the directional
stability of the vehicle on acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
followed by the vehicle and that required by
the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
of physics.
Intelligent traction control
("Snow motion")
Depending on version, your vehicle has
a system to help driving on snow: intelligent
traction control.
This system detects situations of poor surface
grip that could make it difficult to move off
or make progress on deep fresh snow or
compacted snow.
In these situations, the intelligent traction
control limits the amount of wheel spin to
provide the best traction and trajectory control
for your vehicle.
The use of snow tyres is strongly
recommended on surfaces offering low
levels of grip.
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS) and electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD)
When lit up continuously, this
warning lamp indicates a fault with
the ABS.
If this warning lamp comes on, in
conjunction with the STOP and ABS
warning lamps, an audible signal
and a message, it means that the
electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) is defective.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
carefully at moderate speed.
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
In both cases, have the system checked by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as
soon as possible.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
ensure that these are approved for your
vehicle.
When operating under normal conditions,
the ABS may cause the brake pedal to
vibrate slightly.
105
5
Safety
In emergency braking, press the brake
pedal hard and maintain this pressure.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/
Dynamic stability control
(DSC)
Operation
These systems are activated automatically
every time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event of
a problem with grip or trajectory.
Deactivation of the ASR
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate
the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab, then "Traction control".
Deactivation is confirmed by the display of
a message.
The ASR system no longer acts on the
operation of the engine or the brakes in the
event of an involuntary change of trajectory.
Reactivation of the ASR
The system is reactivated automatically every
time the ignition is switched back on or from
31 mph (50 km/h).
Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it
manually:
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab, then "Traction control".
Operating fault
The illumination of this warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, indicates that
there is a fault with these systems.
ASR/DSC
These systems offer increased safety
in normal driving, but they should not
encourage the driver to take extra risks or
drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip
increases. It is therefore important for your
safety to keep these systems activated in
all conditions, and particularly in difficult
conditions.
The correct operation of these systems
depends on observation of the
manufacturer's recommendations, not
only about the wheels (tyres and rims),
braking and electronic components but
also the assembly and repair procedures
used by CITROËN dealers.
To benefit in full from the effectiveness
of these systems in wintry conditions,
the vehicle must be fitted with four snow
tyres, allowing the vehicle to retain neutral
behaviour on the road.
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument
panel.
Reactivate the system when grip conditions
allow.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the systems checked.
106
Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus
improving their protection.
Adjusting the height of the front
belt return
Fastening
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
2nd row rear seat belts
F To adjust the height of the anchorage point,
squeeze the control and slide it up or down
to the notch desired.
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Each of the rear seats is fitted with a three-
point seat belt with inertia reel and force limiter
(except for the centre rear seat).
2
nd
row rear lateral seat belts
(storage)
Guide the strap as it reels in and take the tongue
to the magnet at the lateral anchoring point.
107
5
Safety
2
nd
row rear central seat belt
The seat belt for the rear central position is
integrated into the roof.
To install
Removal and storage
F Press the red button on buckle B, then the
button on buckle A.
F Guide the strap as it reels in and take
tongue B, then A to the magnet at the
anchoring point on the roof.
Before performing any operations on
the rear seats, to avoid damage to the
seat belts check that the lateral belts are
properly tensioned and fasten the tongues
to their anchoring point. The central seat
belt must be completely reeled in.
3
rd
row rear seat belts
To install
Removal and storage
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
F Fasten the strap, flat, to the retention loop.
Ensure seat belts are always fastened
when not in use.
Seat belt not fastened/
unfastened alerts
Front seat belts not fastened
alert
F Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the
right buckle.
F Insert tongue B into the left buckle.
F Check that each buckle is fastened correctly
by pulling the strap.
F Detach the seat belt strap from its retention
loop located in the boot side trim.
F Pull the strap and insert the tongue into the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
The instrument panel includes the seat belts not
fastened warning lamp A as well as the seat belts
not unfastened identification warning lamp B.
When the system detects that a seat belt is
unfastened or fastened, warning lamp A lights
up as well as the corresponding dot(s) in warning
lamp B.
When the ignition is switched on, warning lamp
A and the corresponding dots in warning lamp
B come on if the driver and/or front passenger
have not fastened their seat belts.
108
Safety
At a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h), these
warning lamps flash, associated with an
audible signal, for two minutes. Beyond this
period of time, the warning lamps stay on
continuously until the seat belts are fastened.
Rear seat belts not fastened alert
When the ignition is switched on, with the
engine running or the vehicle moving above
6 mph (10 km/h), warning lamp A and the
corresponding dots in warning lamp B come on
for around thirty seconds, if one or more rear
passengers have not fastened their seat belts.
Seat belts unfastened alert
After the ignition is switched on, warning lamp
A and the corresponding dots in warning lamp
B come on if the driver and/or one or more
passengers unfasten their seat belts.
These warning lamps flash for 30 seconds,
accompanied by an audible signal. Beyond
this period of time, the warning lamps stay on
continuously until the seat belts are fastened.
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the seat belts correctly and that they
are all fastened before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for
short journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles
as they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia
reel permitting automatic adjustment of
the length of the strap to your size. The
seat belt is stowed automatically when not
in use.
The inertia reels have an automatic
locking device at the time of a collision,
during sudden braking or if the vehicle
turns over. You can release the device by
pulling the strap firmly and then releasing
it so that it reels in slightly.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
belt is reeled in correctly.
After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is
positioned and reeled in correctly.
Installation
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the
pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not show any signs of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger
is less than 12 years old or shorter than
one and a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure
more than one child.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information on Child seats,
refer to the corresponding section.
109
5
Safety
Maintenance
In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your
vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified
workshop with the skills and equipment
needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able
to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, particularly if the straps show
signs of damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
CITROËN dealers.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impact, the
pyrotechnic pretensioner may be deployed
before and independently of the airbags.
Deployment of the pretensioners is
accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat
belts system checked and, if necessary,
replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Airbags
General information
This system contributes towards improving the
safety of passengers (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger) in the event of violent
collisions. The airbags supplement the action
of the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all
except the centre rear passenger belt).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the event of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the passengers
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger); immediately after the impact,
the airbags deflate rapidly so that they
do not hinder visibility or the exit of the
passengers,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or
in certain rollover conditions, the airbags
may not be deployed; the seat belt
alone contributes towards ensuring your
protection in these situations.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once. If
a second impact occurs (during the same
or a subsequent accident), the airbag will
not be deployed again.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
The deployment of one or more airbags
is accompanied by a slight emission of
smoke and a noise, due to the detonation
of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in
the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight irritation.
The detonation noise associated with the
deployment of an airbag may result in
a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
110
Safety
Deployment
* For more information on Deactivating
the front passenger airbag, refer to the
corresponding section.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their
forward movement.
Lateral airbags
Deployment
Front airbags
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front
impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the
head and thorax.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The airbags are deployed, except the front
passenger airbag if it is deactivated*, in the
event of a serious front impact to all or part
of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the front to the rear of the
vehicle.
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest,
between the hip and the shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
frame, door side.
It is deployed unilaterally in the event of
a severe side impact covering all or part of side
impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the outside towards the
inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
Curtain airbags
System contributing towards greater protection
for the driver and passengers (with the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact in order to limit
the risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
on a horizontal plane and directed from the
outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Malfunction
If this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, you must contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system
checked.
111
5
Safety
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on
the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls
over, the airbags may not be deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
none of the lateral airbags are deployed.
Advice
For the airbags to be fully effective,
observe the safety recommendations
below.
Adopt a normal and upright sitting
position.
Fasten your seat belt, ensuring it is
positioned correctly.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything
close to or in the way of the airbag release
trajectory; this could cause injuries during
their deployment.
Never modify the original definition of your
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has
been stolen or broken into, have the
airbag systems checked.
All work on the airbag systems must
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out.
The airbag inflates almost instantly (within
a few milliseconds) then deflates within
the same time discharging the hot gas via
openings provided for this purpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel
by its spokes or resting your hands on the
centre part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on
the dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the
airbags can cause burns or the risk of
injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering
wheel or hit it violently.
Do not fix or attach anything to the
steering wheel or dashboard, this could
cause injuries with deployment of the
airbags.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
as this could cause head injuries when
the curtain airbag is deployed.
If fitted to your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they
play a part in securing the curtain airbags.
112
Safety
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment of the
lateral airbags. For information on the
product range of seat covers suitable for
your vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
backrests (clothes, etc.) as this could
cause injuries to the thorax or arm when
the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body
any nearer to the door than necessary.
The vehicle's front door panels include
side impact sensors.
A damaged door or any unauthorised or
incorrectly executed work (modification or
repair) on the front doors or their interior
trim could compromise the operation of
these sensors – risk of malfunction of the
lateral airbags!
Such work must only be done by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
General points relating to
child seats
The regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- In accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt
or ISOFIX mountings.
- Statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the rear
seats.
- A child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
It is recommended that children travel on
the rear seats of your vehicle:
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
- "forward facing" over the age of 3.
Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and
tightened correctly.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
that the support leg is in firm and steady
contact with the floor.
At the front: if necessary, adjust the
passenger seat.
At the rear: if necessary, adjust the
relevant front seat.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with backrest
on a passenger seat.
Refit the head restraint once the child seat
has been removed.
Child seat at the rear
"Rearward facing"
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the "rearward facing" child seat does
not touch the vehicle's front seat.
113
5
Safety
"Forward facing"
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the "forward
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat.
3rd row seats
Child seat at the front
"Rearward facing"
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal
and lowest position, with the backrest
straightened. Then pull the booster/height
adjuster control 11 times.
The front passenger airbag must be
deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks
being seriously injured or killed in case
of airbag deployment.
"Forward facing"
When a "forward facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat,
adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate
longitudinal and lowest position, with the
backrest straightened. Then pull the booster/
height adjuster control 11 times. Leave the
passenger's airbag active.
Passenger seat adjusted into the intermediate
longitudinal and lowest position, then the
booster/height adjuster control pulled 11 times.
When a child seat is installed on a rear
passenger seat in the 3
rd
row, move the
seats in the 2
nd
row forward and straighten the
backrest so that the child seat and the child's
legs do not touch the seat in the 2
nd
row.
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on a rear passenger seat in the 3rd
row,
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
Never install a "rearward facing" child
restraint system on a seat protected by an
active front airbag. This could cause the
death of the child or serious injury.
114
Safety
The warning label present on both sides of the
passenger sun visor repeats this advice.
In line with current legislation, you will find this
warning in all the required languages in the
following tables.
Passenger airbag OFF
Passenger airbag deactivation
switch
Only the front passenger airbag can be
deactivated.
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the
passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the OFF position.
F Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
When the ignition is switched on,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel. It stays on while
the airbag is deactivated.
To ensure the safety of your child, the front
passenger airbag must be deactivated
when you install a "rearward facing" child
seat on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Reactivating the front passenger
airbag
When you remove the "rearward facing" child
seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
the ON position to reactivate the airbag and so
assure the safety of your front passenger in the
event of an impact.
When the ignition is switched on,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, for approximately
one minute to signal that the front
airbag is activated.
115
5
Safety
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung,
das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja
avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT.
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez
a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
116
Safety
LV
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к
ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu
nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
117
5
Safety
Recommended child seats
Range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three-point seat belt.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX XP"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Is only installed on the outer rear seats.
The head restraint on the vehicle seat must
be removed.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Is installed in the "rearward facing" position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L6
"GRACO Booster"
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Is only installed on the front passenger seat
or on the outer rear seats.
118
Safety
Installing a child seat attached with the seat belt
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
(a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Seat position
Groups 0 (b) and 0+)
Birth to 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 3
22-36 kg
1
st
row
Front passenger seat (c)
- fixed U U U U
- height adjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
2
nd
row
Fixed outer rear seats and
centre rear seat (d)
Longitudinally-adjustable
outer rear seats (d) (e)
U U U U
3
rd
row Outer rear seats U U U U
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can
be installed in all vehicles using the
seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant
car seats and "car cots" cannot be
installed on the front passenger seat or
in the 3
rd
row. When installed in the 2
nd
row, they may prevent the use of the
other seats.
(c) Refer to the current legislation in your
country before installing your child on
this seat.
119
5
Safety
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
latches which are easily secured on the two
rings A.
Some also have an upper strap which is
attached to ring B.
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance
with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX
compliant mountings:
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward facing or forward facing,
move the front seat forward, then
straighten the backrest to allow enough
space for the child seat and the child's
legs.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward facing or forward facing,
adjust the rear seat to the fully back
position with the backrest straightened.
U: seat suitable for the installation of
a child seat secured using a seat belt
and universally approved, rearward
and/or forward facing, with the front
seat which must be adjusted in the
intermediate longitudinal position.
U(R): as with U, with the passenger seat
that must be adjusted to the low
position with 11 actions on the seat
height control and in the intermediate
longitudinal position.
There are three rings for each seat:
- two rings A, located between the vehicle's
seat backrest and cushion, indicated by
a marking,
- a ring B, located under a cover on the back
of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as
the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.
Its position is indicated by a marking.
Located on the back of the seat backrest, the
TOP TETHER is used to secure the upper strap
of child seats that have one. This device limits
forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of
a front impact.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
120
Safety
- detach the TOP TETHER cover by pulling
its cut-out,
- pass the upper strap of the child seat over
the seat backrest, centring it between the
openings for the head restraint rods,
- fix the hook of the upper strap to ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in
a vehicle compromises the protection of
the child in the event of an accident.
Strictly observe the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
For information on the possibilities for
installing ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
Recommended ISOFIX child
seats
Also consult the user guide from the child
seat's manufacturer to find out how to
install and remove the seat.
RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX
base
(size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX
base which is attached to rings A.
The base has a height adjustable support leg
that rests on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be secured with
a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used
and must be attached to the vehicle seat
using the three-point seat belt.
Baby P2C Mini and its ISOFIX base
(size categories: C, D, E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX
base which is attached to rings A.
The base has a height adjustable support leg
that rests on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be secured with a
seat belt.
In this case, only the shell is used and must
be attached to the vehicle seat using the
three-point seat belt.
121
5
Safety
Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size
classes: D, C, A, B, B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX
base which is attached to rings A.
The base has a height adjustable support leg
that rests on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be used "forward
facing".
This child seat cannot be secured with
a seat belt.
We recommend that you use the seat in the
"rearward facing" position up to the age of
3 years.
Summary tables of locations for
ISOFIX child seats
In line with European regulations, these tables
indicate the options for installing ISOFIX child
seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal
ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category,
determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated
on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
122
Safety
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to about
6 months
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
Under 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to about 1 year
9-18 kg (group 1)
From about 1 to 3 years old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Fixed rear outer seats IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU X IUF, IL-SU
Longitudinally-adjustable rear outer
seats
IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU (1) IUF/IL-SU
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be
installed on the front passenger seat.
** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured to the
lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies all
of the space on the rear bench seat.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of
an ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forward
facing" secured using the upper strap
on the upper ring of ISOFIX seating
positions.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of
an Isofix Semi-Universal seat which
can be:
- "rearward facing" fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with
a support leg, or
- an infant car seat fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg.
X: seat not suitable for the installation of
a child seat or infant car seat for the
weight group indicated.
(1): the outer row 2 seat must be adjusted
to the maximum forward position minus
3 notches.
For more information on the ISOFIX
mountings and in particular the upper strap,
refer to the corresponding section.
123
5
Safety
IUF:
seat suitable for the installation of an
ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forwar d faci ng"
secured using the upper strap on the
upper ring of ISOFIX seating positions.
IL-SU:
seat suitable for the installation of an
Isofix Semi-Universal seat which can
be:
- "rearward facing" fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with
a support leg, or
- an infant car seat fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg.
For more information on the ISOFIX mountings
and in particular the upper strap, refer to the
corresponding section.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to about
6 months
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
Under 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to about 1 year
9-18 kg (group 1)
From about 1 to 3 years old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Fixed rear outer seats IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
Longitudinally-adjustable rear outer
seats
IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
3
rd
row rear seat Not ISOFIX
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be
installed on the front passenger seat.
** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured to the
lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies all
of the space on the rear bench seat.
X:
seat not suitable for the installation of
a child seat or infant car seat for the
weight group indicated.
124
Safety
Child lock
This mechanical system prevents opening of
a rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of each rear
door and locking is independent for each door.
Locking
Unlocking
F Using the integral ignition key, turn the
control as far as it will go:
- to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the left on the right-hand rear door.
F Using the integral ignition key, turn the
control as far as it will go:
- to the left on the left-hand rear door,
- to the right on the right-hand rear door.
Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in
a vehicle compromises the protection of
the child in the event of an accident.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat
belt buckle under the child seat, as this
could destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack
relative to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the seat
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it
secures the child seat firmly on the seat
of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is
adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.
The head restraint must be removed
before installing a child seat with
a backrest on a passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event
of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint
when the child seat is removed.
Children at the rear
At rear seating positions, always leave
sufficient space between the front seat
and:
- a "rearward facing" child seat,
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
"forward facing".
To do this, move the front seat forwards
and, if necessary, straighten its backrest.
For optimal installation of the "forward
facing" child seat, verify that its backrest is
as close as possible to the backrest of the
vehicle seat, if possible in contact with it.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying children on the
front passenger seat is specific to each
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
the country in which you are driving.
Deactivate the front passenger airbag
when a "rearward facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seats.
Otherwise, there is a risk of serious or
fatal injury to the child if the airbag is
deployed.
125
5
Safety
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
We recommend using a booster seat with
a backrest, equipped with a belt guide at
shoulder level.
Additional protections
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and rear windows, use the child lock.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays
of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear
windows.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unattended in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with the
windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
126
Driving
Driving advice
Observe driving regulations and remain vigilant
whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
react at any time to any eventuality.
As a safety measure, the driver should only
carry out any operations that require close
attention when the vehicle is stationary.
On a long journey, taking a break every two
hours is strongly recommended.
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate
the need to brake and increase the distance
from other vehicles.
Never leave the engine running in
an enclosed area without adequate
ventilation: internal combustion engines
emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon
monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and
death!
In very severe wintry conditions
(temperatures below -23°C), to guarantee
correct operation and the longevity of
the mechanical elements of your vehicle
(engine and gearbox), the engine must be
left running for 4 minutes before driving.
Important!
Never drive with the parking brake applied
– Risk of overheating and damage to the
braking system!
As the exhaust system of your vehicle
is very hot, even several minutes after
switching off the engine, never park or run
the engine on inflammable surfaces (dry
grass, fallen leaves, etc.) – Risk of fire!
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with
the engine running. If you have to leave
your vehicle with the engine running, apply
the parking brake and put the gearbox into
neutral or position N or P, depending on
the type of gearbox.
Driving on flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
roads, as this could cause serious damage
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
electrical systems of your vehicle.
If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road:
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start function,
- drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h),
- do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety
conditions allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
127
6
Driving
In case of towing
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and
requires extra care from the driver.
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towable load on an incline
depends on the gradient and the exterior
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
F If this warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine as soon as possible.
New vehicle
Do not pull a trailer before having driven at least
approximately 620 miles (1,000 kilometres).
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of
engine braking is recommended.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer and the headlamp beam height
of your vehicle.
For more information on Headlamp
adjustment, refer to the corresponding
section.
Certain driving or manoeuvring aid
functions are automatically disabled if an
approved towing system is used.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic immobiliser
The keys contain an electronic chip which has
a secret code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few moments
after the ignition is switched off, and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
In the event of a malfunction, you are informed
by a message in the instrument panel screen.
If this happens, your vehicle will not start;
contact a CITROËN dealer if required.
Starting/switching off
the engine using the
electronic key
Starting the engine
128
Driving
F Place the gear selector at P or N for
vehicles with an automatic gearbox or
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.
F Place the electronic key in the reader.
F Press the brake pedal for vehicles with an
automatic gearbox, or fully depress the
clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual
gearbox.
F Briefly press the "START/STOP" button.
The steering column unlocks and the engine
starts more or less instantly.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock.
For Diesel vehicles, in sub-zero temperatures
the engine will not start until the pre-heater
warning lamp has gone off.
If one of the starting conditions is not met,
a reminder message is displayed in the
instrument panel. In some circumstances, it is
necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly
while pressing the "START/STOP" button to
assist unlocking of the steering; a message
warns you when this is needed.
With petrol engines, after a cold start,
preheating the catalytic converter can
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary
with the engine running (accelerated idle
speed).
If this warning lamp comes on after
pressing the "START/STOP" button,
press down on the brake or clutch
pedal until the warning lamp goes
off, without pressing the "START/
STOP" button again, until the engine
starts and runs.
Switching off the engine
F Immobilise the vehicle.
F Place the gear selector at P or N for
vehicles with an automatic gearbox or
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering column
locks.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock.
F Remove the electronic key from the reader.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
engine will not stop.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
braking assistance.
Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine
can be switched off without conditions (even
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about
three seconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock.
Electronic key left in the reader
You will be warned by a message if the
electronic key is still in the reader on
opening the driver's door.
129
6
Driving
Starting/switching off the
engine with Keyless Entry
and Starting
Starting the engine
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic
key must be inside the vehicle.
If the electronic key is not detected in this
zone, a message is displayed.
Move the electronic key into this zone so
that the engine can be started.
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key
not detected – Back-up starting" section.
F Press the "START/STOP" button while
maintaining pressure on the pedal until the
engine starts.
The steering column unlocks and the engine
starts.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock.
For Diesel engines, when the temperature is
negative and/or the engine is cold, the start
will only take place once the preheater warning
lamp is off.
F With an automatic gearbox, you should
keep the brake pedal fully depressed and
not press the "START/STOP" button again
until the engine is running.
If one of the starting conditions is not met,
a reminder message is displayed in the
instrument panel.
In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel slightly while pressing the
"START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of
the steering column.
With petrol engines, after a cold start,
preheating the catalytic converter can
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
up to 2 minutes while stationary with the
engine running (accelerated idle speed).
As a safety measure, never leave the
vehicle while the engine is running.
Switching off the engine
F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle.
F With a manual gearbox, preferably put the
gear lever into neutral.
F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
into neutral.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
fully depress the clutch pedal.
or
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
selector in mode P or N.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
press the brake pedal.
If this warning lamp comes on after
pressing the "START/STOP" button:
F With a manual gearbox, you should keep
the clutch pedal fully depressed and not
press the "START/STOP" button again until
the engine is running.
130
Driving
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering column
locks.
In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel to lock the steering column.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock, but the gearbox locks in mode P.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
engine will not stop.
Never leave your vehicle with the
electronic key still inside.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
braking assistance.
Key not detected
Back-up starting
When the electronic key is in the recognition
zone and after pressing the "START/STOP"
button, the engine does not start:
F Place the gear selector at P or N for
vehicles with an automatic gearbox or
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.
F Place the electronic key in the back-up
reader.
F Press the brake pedal on vehicles with an
automatic gearbox, or fully depress the
clutch pedal with a manual gearbox.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine starts.
F With an automatic gearbox, preferably
select mode P or N.
Back-up switch-off
F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
about three seconds.
In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine
can be switched off without conditions (even
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about
three seconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.
When the electronic key is not detected or is
no longer in the recognition zone, a message
appears in the instrument panel when closing
a door or trying to switch off the engine.
131
6
Driving
Switching the ignition on
(without starting)
With the electronic key in the reader or the
Keyless Entry and Starting key inside the
vehicle, pressing the "START/STOP" button,
with no action on the pedals, allows the
ignition to be switched on.
F Press the "START/STOP" button, the
instrument panel comes on but the engine
does not start.
F Press the button again to switch off the
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.
With the ignition on, the system
automatically changes to energy economy
mode when required to maintain an
adequate state of charge of the battery.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock.
Electric parking brake
The technology adopted for the electric
parking brake does not allow the fitment of
15-inch wheels.
Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and in the control
lever to confirm the application of
the parking brake.
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking
brake.
The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes
during manual application or release.
After applying the parking brake, the
simultaneous flashing of the indicator lamps
in the instrument panel and in the control lever
warns you to secure the immobilisation of the
vehicle by engaging a gear (with a manual
gearbox or by placing the selector at position
P with an automatic gearbox or by placing
a chock against one of the wheels (e.g. parking
on a very steep slope or a steep slope with
a weak battery).
In the event of a battery failure, the
electric parking brake no longer works.
As a safety measure, if the parking brake
is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by
engaging a gear (with a manual gearbox)
or placing a chock against one of the
wheels.
Call a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The system provides, in automatic operation,
the application of the parking brake on
switching off the engine and release as the
vehicle moves off.
The driver can take over at any time to apply
or release the parking brake, by operating the
control lever:
- by briefly pulling the control lever to apply
the brake,
- by briefly pushing the control lever, while
pressing the brake pedal, to release it.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
132
Driving
Label on door panel
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the
parking brake is applied: the indicator
lamps in the instrument panel and the
control lever must be on fixed.
If the parking brake is not applied, there
is an audible signal and a message is
displayed on opening the driver's door.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they could
release the parking brake.
When towing, parking on a steep slope,
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn
the wheels towards the kerb and engage
a gear (with a manual gearbox) or place
the gear selector at position P with an
automatic gearbox.
For towing, you vehicle is approved for
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
Manual operation
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake:
F press the brake pedal,
F while maintaining pressure on the brake
pedal, briefly push the control lever.
The complete release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
If you push the control lever without
pressing the brake pedal, the parking
brake will not be released and a message
is displayed.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary:
F pull briefly on the control lever.
Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by
flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
lever.
Application of the parking brake is confirmed
by illumination of the brake indicator lamp
and the P indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake applied".
Automatic operation
Automatic release
Ensure first that the engine is running and the
driver's door is properly closed.
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively when the
vehicle moves off.
With a manual gearbox
F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1
st
gear or reverse.
F Press the accelerator pedal and release the
clutch pedal.
With an automatic gearbox
F Press the brake pedal.
F Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal.
133
6
Driving
With an automatic gearbox, if the brake
does not release automatically, check that
the front doors are correctly closed.
The complete release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
When stationary with the engine running, do not
depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
you risk releasing the parking brake.
Automatic application
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
Application of the parking brake is confirmed
by illumination of the brake indicator lamp
and the P indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake applied".
Automatic application does not take place
if the engine stalls or goes into STOP
mode of Stop & Start.
With automatic operation, you can also
manually apply or release the parking
brake at any time using the control lever.
Special cases
In some situations, you may need to operate
the parking brake manually.
Immobilisation of the vehicle
with the engine running
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine
running, briefly pull the control lever.
Application of the parking brake is confirmed
by illumination of the brake indicator lamp
and the P indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake applied".
Parking the vehicle with the
brake released
In very cold conditions (ice), it is
recommended that the parking brake not
be applied.
To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear
or fit the chocks against one of the wheels.
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the
parking brake released
F Switch off the engine.
Application of the parking brake is
confirmed by illumination of the indicator
lamps in the instrument panel and the
control lever.
F Switch on the ignition again, without starting
the engine.
F Release the parking brake manually by
pushing the control lever while keeping your
foot on the brake pedal.
The complete release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
F Switch off the ignition.
Deactivating automatic
operation
In some situations, for example when it is
extremely cold or during towing (caravan,
recovery), it may be necessary to deactivate
automatic operation of the system.
F Start the engine.
F Apply the parking brake with the control
lever, if it is released.
134
Driving
F Take your foot fully off the brake pedal.
F Push and hold the control lever in the
release direction for at least 10 seconds and
no more than 15 seconds.
F Release the control lever.
F Press and hold the brake pedal.
F Pull the control lever in the application
direction for 2 seconds.
Deactivation of the automatic
functions is confirmed by
illumination of this indicator lamp in
the instrument panel.
F Release the control lever and the brake
pedal.
From now on, the parking brake can only
be applied and released manually using the
control lever.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
operation.
Reactivation of automatic operation is
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel going off.
Emergency braking
The emergency braking should only be
used in an exceptional situation.
In the event of a failure of the main service
brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
taken ill, under instruction, etc.), a continuous
pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.
Braking takes place while the control lever is
being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever
is released.
The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of
the vehicle during emergency braking.
If the emergency braking malfunctions,
the message "Parking brake fault" will be
displayed.
If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction,
signalled by the illumination of one or both
warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
immobilised.
Hill start assist
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This system only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- certain slope conditions are met,
- the driver's door is closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
held temporarily by hill start assist.
If you need to get out of the vehicle with
the engine running, apply the parking
brake manually. Then verify that the
parking brake warning lamp (and the
warning lamp P on the electric parking
brake control lever) are on continuously.
Operation
Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the
vehicle is held for a short time when you
release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral with
a manual gearbox.
135
6
Driving
5-speed manual gearbox
Engaging reverse gear
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and
reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
for a short time when you release the brake
pedal.
Operating fault
- provided you are in mode D or M with an
automatic gearbox.
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
lamps come on, accompanied by an alert
message. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Failure to follow this advice could cause
permanent damage to the gearbox
(inadvertent engagement of 3
rd
or 4
th
gear).
Engaging reverse gear
F Raise the ring under the knob and move the
gear lever to the left then forwards.
F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the
gear lever in neutral.
F Move the gear lever to the right then pull it
back.
136
Driving
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
Automatic gearbox
Six or eight-speed automatic gearbox with
steering wheel-mounted selector. It also offers
a manual mode with gear changes via steering
mounted paddles located behind the steering
wheel.
Gear selector
P. Park.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
brake applied or released.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle
stationary, engine at idle.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
brake applied.
- Starting the engine.
D. Automatic operation.
M. Manual operation with sequential
changing of the gears.
To come out of position P, shift the
selector to the right to the required
position, while pressing the brake pedal to
the floor.
Steering mounted controls
To select position P, move the selector to
the uppermost position (towards R), then
push it forwards, then to the left.
Only engage it when the vehicle is
completely stationary. In this position, the
front wheels are locked. Ensure that the
selector is positioned correctly.
To move the selector, switch on the
ignition or start the engine.
When the battery charge is too low, it will
not be possible to move the selector.
+. Control paddle to change up, to the right
of the steering wheel.
F Pull the "+" control paddle towards you to
change up.
-. Control paddle to change down, to the left
of the steering wheel.
F Pull the "-" control paddle towards you to
change down.
The steering mounted paddles do not
allow neutral to be selected, nor reverse
gear to be engaged or disengaged.
137
6
Driving
Displays on the instrument panel
Starting the vehicle
F With your foot on the brake pedal, select
position P or N.
F Start the engine.
If these conditions are not met, an audible
signal is issued together with a message.
If P is displayed on the instrument panel
but the gear selector is in another position,
move the selector to position P to allow
the engine to be started.
F With the engine running, press the brake
pedal.
F Select automatic mode (position D),
sequential mode (position M) or reverse
(position R).
If you do not press the brake
pedal when trying to move
the gear selector out of
position P, this warning lamp
or this symbol appears on
the instrument panel with the
message "Shift automatic
gearbox to P", the P symbol
flashes and a beep sounds.
F If the parking brake is released, the vehicle
moves off.
If the parking brake is applied and automatic
mode is activated, accelerate gradually.
If the parking brake does not release
automatically, check that the front doors
are properly closed.
Never press the brake and accelerator
pedals at the same time. Braking or
accelerating must be done with the
right foot only. Pressing the two pedals
simultaneously risks damaging the
gearbox.
If position R, D or M is selected when the
engine is running at idle, with the brakes
released, the vehicle moves even without
the accelerator being pressed.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle when the engine is running.
When carrying out maintenance with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
and select position P.
When you move the selector, the indicator
corresponding to its position is displayed on the
instrument panel.
F Check that the display on the instrument
panel agrees with the position engaged.
F Gradually release the brake pedal.
P. Parking.
R. Reverse.
N. Neutral.
D. Drive (Automatic operation).
1 to 6 or 8. Gears engaged during manual
operation.
-. Invalid value during manual
operation.
138
Driving
Never select position N while the vehicle
is moving. If position N is selected by
mistake while driving, allow the engine
to return to idle, then select position D to
accelerate.
Never select position P or R unless the
vehicle is completely stationary.
If you wish to engage reverse gear,
to prevent jolting, do not accelerate
immediately after selecting R.
Selection of position R is accompanied by
the sound of a beep.
In the event of a battery failure, you
must place the chocks supplied with the
vehicle tools against one of the wheels to
immobilise the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
never try to start the engine by pushing
the vehicle.
Automatic mode
F Select position D.
D and the gear engaged appear in the
instrument panel.
The gearbox operates in auto-adaptive mode,
without any action by the driver. It continuously
selects the gear best suited to the following
parameters:
- optimisation of fuel consumption,
- style of driving,
- road conditions,
- vehicle load.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the selector, press the accelerator fully down
(kick-down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or holds the gear selected until
the maximum engine speed is reached.
When braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide effective engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
safety reasons.
Temporary control of gear
changing
You can temporarily take control of gear
changes using the steering mounted control
paddles "+" and "-". The gear change
instruction is acted on if the engine speed
permits.
This function allows you to anticipate certain
situations, such as overtaking another vehicle
or approaching a bend in the road.
After a few moments with no action on the
control paddles, the gearbox returns to
automatic operation.
Manual mode
F Select position M.
F Use the steering mounted control paddles
"+" and "-" to change gears.
The gears engaged are displayed in sequence
in the instrument panel.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving very
slowly, the gearbox automatically selects gear 1.
139
6
Driving
In sequential mode, it is not necessary to
release the accelerator pedal when changing
gear.
Changing from one gear to another only
occurs if the vehicle speed and engine speed
conditions allow; otherwise the gearbox will
operate temporarily in automatic mode.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then
the gear actually engaged is displayed.
Invalid value during manual operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear
is not engaged correctly (selector
between two positions).
You can change mode at any time by
moving the gear selector from D to M or
vice versa.
Stopping the vehicle
door is opened or approximately 45 seconds
after the ignition is switched off, an audible
signal sounds and a message appears:
F reposition the lever to position P; the
audible signal stops and the message
disappears.
Whatever the parking circumstances, you must
apply the parking brake manually to immobilise
the vehicle if automatic operation has been
deactivated.
In all circumstances, ensure that the
selector is in position P before leaving
your vehicle.
Before switching off the engine, you can
engage position P or N to place the gearbox
in neutral. In both cases, apply the parking
brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is
programmed to automatic mode.
If the lever is not in position P, when the driver's
In the event of a battery failure, use the
chock to immobilise your vehicle.
Operating fault
If the gearbox malfunctions, the
Service warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed
restrictions permitting.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may then
feel a substantial jolt when changing from P to
R and from N to R. This jolt will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
Gear efciency indicator
This system reduces fuel consumption by
recommending the most appropriate gear.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
Gear efficiency recommendations are for
information only. In fact, the road layout, the
traffic density and safety remain the deciding
factors when choosing the best gear. The driver
therefore remains responsible for deciding
whether or not to follow the indications issued
by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
With an automatic gearbox, the system is
only active in manual mode.
140
Driving
The information appears in the
instrument panel in the form of an
arrow.
With a manual gearbox, the arrow may be
accompanied by the gear recommended.
This arrow may be pointing up or down,
depending on the context.
The system adapts its gear efficiency
recommendation according to the driving
conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the
driver's requirements (power, acceleration,
braking, etc.).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear.
Stop & Start
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions as well as the noise level when
stationary.
The Stop & Start system puts the engine
temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or
other, etc.). The engine restarts automatically –
START mode – as soon as you wish to move off
again.
Restarting occurs instantaneously, quickly and
silently.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and the engine
goes into standby automatically.
- With a manual gearbox, at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h), or with the vehicle
stationary (with the PureTech 110, 130 and
BlueHDi 100, 130 versions), when you place
the gear lever in neutral and you release the
clutch pedal,
- With an automatic gearbox, at speeds
below 2 mph (3 km/h), or when the vehicle
is stationary (depending on version), when
you press the brake pedal or place the gear
selector into position N.
If your vehicle is fitted with this system, a time
counter calculates the sum of the periods in
STOP mode during a journey. It resets to zero
every time the ignition is switched on with the
"START/STOP" button.
For your convenience, during parking
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available
for a few seconds after coming out of
reverse gear.
The Stop & Start system does not modify
the vehicle's functions, such as, for
example, braking, power steering, etc.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition with
the "START/STOP" button.
Special cases: STOP mode not
available
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the "START/STOP" button,
- the electric parking brake is applied or being
applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain
a comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
141
6
Driving
Going into engine START mode
This indicator lamp goes off and the
engine restarts automatically.
- With a manual gearbox, when you fully
depress the clutch pedal.
- With an automatic gearbox:
• gear selector in position D or M, when
you release the brake pedal,
• or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you place the gear
selector in position D or M,
• or when you engage reverse gear.
Special cases: START mode
activated automatically
START mode is activated automatically if:
- you open the driver's door,
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 16 mph
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox (2 mph
(3 km/h) with PureTech 110, 130, THP 165,
180 and BlueHDi 100, 130 versions), 2 mph
(3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- certain specific conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
air conditioning setting, etc.) where the
engine is needed for control of the system
or vehicle.
Deactivation/Manual
reactivation
- certain special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
exterior temperature, etc.) where the engine
is needed for control of the system.
In this case, this indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds then goes
off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
In this case, this indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes
off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
In certain circumstances, such as to
maintain the temperature in the passenger
compartment, it may be necessary to
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
The system can be deactivated at any time,
once the ignition is switched on.
If the engine is in STOP mode, it then restarts.
The Stop & Start system is reactivated
automatically every time the ignition is switched
on.
The Stop & Start is deactivated in the Driving
menu of the touch screen.
Select "Stop & Start" to deactivate the system.
It is indicated by this warning lamp
coming on.
Select "Stop & Start" again to reactivate the
function.
It is indicated by this indicator lamp
coming on.
Use of the adaptive cruise control
deactivates the Stop & Start function.
Operating fault
If the system fails, this warning lamp
flashes for a few seconds before
lighting up continuously, associated
with a message.
142
Driving
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
If a fault occurs in STOP mode, the engine may
stall.
All of the instrument panel warning lamps come
on.
Depending on version, an alert message may also
be displayed, asking you to place the gear lever in
position N and press the brake pedal.
It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and
start the engine again using the "START/STOP"
button.
The Stop & Start requires the use of
a 12 V battery of special specification and
technology.
All work on this type of battery must be
carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
For more information on the 12 V battery,
refer to the corresponding section.
Opening the bonnet
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid
the risk of injury related to an automatic
change to START mode.
Driving on flooded roads
Before driving in a flooded area, it is
strongly recommended that you deactivate
the Stop & Start system.
For more information on Driving advice,
particularly on flooded roads, refer to the
corresponding section.
Tyre under-ination
detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system monitors the pressure of the four
tyres when the vehicle is moving.
It compares the information given by the
wheel speed sensors with reference values,
which must be reinitialised after every tyre
pressure adjustment or wheel change.
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
detects a drop in the pressure of one or more
tyres.
The under-inflation detection system does
not replace the need for vigilance on the
part of the driver.
This system does not avoid the need to
check the tyre pressures (including the
spare wheel) every month as well as
before a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres worsens
road-holding, lengthens braking distances,
causes premature wear of the tyres,
particularly in adverse conditions (heavy
loads, high speeds, long journeys).
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
The inflation pressures defined for your
vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
label.
For more information on the
Identification markings, refer to the
corresponding section.
143
6
Driving
Checking tyre pressures
This check should be done when the tyres
are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or
after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km)
at moderate speeds).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the
values indicated on the label.
Under-inflation alert
This is indicated by continuous
illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and, depending
on equipment, the display of
a message.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive
steering movements and sudden braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
The loss of pressure detected does not
always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual
check.
F If it is not possible to make this check
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
speed.
or
F In case of a puncture, use the temporary
puncture repair kit or the spare wheel
(depending on equipment).
The alert is kept active until the system is
reinitialised.
Reinitialisation
The system must be reinitialised after any
adjustment to the pressures of one or more
tyres, and after changing one or more wheels.
Before reinitialising the system, ensure
that the pressures of the four tyres
are correct for the conditions of use
of the vehicle and conform to the
recommendations on the tyre pressure
label.
The under-inflation alert can only be relied
on if the reinitialisation of the system has
been done with the pressures in the four
tyres correctly adjusted.
The under-inflation detection system
does not give a warning if a pressure is
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
Snow chains
The system does not have to be
reinitialised after fitting or removing snow
chains.
Reinitialisation of the system is done on the
touch screen, with the ignition on and the
vehicle stationary.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab, then "Under-inflation
initialisation".
F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes",
an audible signal and a message confirm
the reinitialisation.
The new pressure parameters saved are
treated as reference values by the system.
Malfunction
F If you have a compressor, such as the one
in the temporary puncture repair kit, check
the pressures of the four tyres when cold.
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
tyres is no longer provided.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the
under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
by illumination of the Service warning lamp
indicates a fault with the system.
A message appears, accompanied by an
audible signal.
144
Driving
Memorising speeds
This function allows speeds to be saved, which
can then be offered to set the two systems: the
speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle)
or the cruise control (for a vehicle cruising
speed).
You can memorise up to six speed settings
for each of the two systems. By default, some
speed settings are already memorised.
Memorisation
This function can be accessed in the Driving
menu of the touch screen.
F Select the "Driving functions" tab then
Adjusting Speeds.
F Press the button corresponding to the
speed setting you want to modify.
F Enter the new value using the numerical
keypad and confirm.
As a safety measure, the driver must carry
out these operations when stationary.
After carrying out any work on the system,
the pressure of the four tyres must be
checked and the system reinitialised.
F Select the system for which you want to
memorise new speed settings.
Speed Limit recognition
and recommendation
This system allows the speed limit detected by
the camera to be displayed in the instrument
panel.
The system also processes speed limit
information from the navigation system
mapping.
You should update your navigation
mapping regularly in order to receive
accurate speed limit information from the
system.
Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy
goods vehicles, are not displayed.
The display of the speed limit in the instrument
panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign
intended for cars (light vehicles).
145
6
Driving
The speed limit units (mph or km/h)
depend on the country you are driving in.
This should be taken into account in order
to observe the speed limit.
For the system to operate correctly when
you change country, the units for speed in
the instrument panel must be those for the
country you are driving in.
The automatic reading of road signs is
a driving assistance system and does not
always display speed limits correctly.
The speed limit signs present on the road
always take priority over the display by the
system.
The system cannot in any circumstances
replace the need for vigilance on the part
of the driver.
The driver must observe the driving
regulations and must adapt the speed of
the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic.
The system may not display the speed
limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign
within a preset period.
The system is designed to detect signs
that conform to the Vienna Convention on
road signs.
To maintain correct operation of the
system: regularly clean the area in front of
the camera.
The internal surface of the windscreen can
also become misted around the camera.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Activation/Deactivation
Activation and deactivation of the system is
done in the touch screen's Driving menu.
Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
"Security"/"Safety" and "Recommended
speed display".
Displays in the instrument panel
1. Detected speed limit indication.
or
2. Indication of the end of the speed limit.
The system is active but is not detecting speed
limit information.
On detection of speed limit information, the
system displays the value.
Operating limits
The legislation on speed limits is specific to
each country.
The system does not take account of reduced
speed limits in the following cases:
- poor weather (rain, snow),
- atmospheric pollution,
- when towing,
- driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
or snow chains fitted,
- puncture repair using the temporary repair
kit,
- young drivers, etc.
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it from
working:
- poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
falling snow, rain, fog),
146
Driving
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow-
covered, damaged or covered by a sticker,
- fault with the camera,
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
- obstructed road signs (by other vehicles,
vegetation, snow),
- speed limit signs that do not conform to the
standard, are damaged or distorted.
Recommendation
For more information on the Speed
limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive
cruise control, refer to the corresponding
sections.
Steering mounted controls
Display in the instrument panel
In addition to Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation, the driver can select the
speed displayed as a speed setting for the
speed limiter or cruise control using the speed
limiter or cruise control memorisation button.
1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode.
2. Memorise a speed setting.
3. Speed limit indication.
4. Memorise the speed.
5. Current speed setting.
Memorising the speed
On detection of a sign offering a new speed
limit, the system displays the value and MEM
flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it
a new speed setting.
If there is a difference of less than 6 mph
(10 km/h) between the speed setting and
the speed displayed by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation, the
MEM symbol is not displayed.
Depending on the road conditions, several
speeds may be displayed.
F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
Speed limiter/cruise control information is
displayed.
F Make an initial press on button 2 to request
saving of the speed suggested.
A message is displayed to confirm the request.
F Press button 2 again to confirm and save
the new speed setting.
After a predetermined period, the screen
returns to the current display.
147
6
Driving
Speed limiter "LIMIT"
System which prevents the
vehicle from exceeding the speed
programmed by the driver.
Once the programmed speed limit is reached,
additional pressure on the accelerator pedal
has no effect.
Operation of the speed limiter requires
a programmed speed of at least 19 mph
(30 km/h).
The speed limiter is paused using the control.
The programmed speed can be exceeded
temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly
beyond the point of resistance.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal until the set
speed limit has been reached again.
The programmed speed remains in the system
memory when the ignition is switched off.
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
Steering mounted controls
For more information on Memorising speeds,
refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation and its
memorisation, refer to the corresponding
section.
Displays in the instrument panel
6. Speed limiter on/off indicator.
7. Speed limiter mode selected.
8. Value of the speed setting.
Switching on/Pause
F Turn wheel 1 to the LIMIT position: the
speed limiter mode is selected but is not
switched on (Pause).
F Switch the speed limiter on by pressing
button 4, if the speed displayed is suitable
(by default, the last speed programmed).
F You can pause the speed limiter by pressing
button 4 again: the display confirms that it
has been stopped (Pause).
1. Select speed limiter mode.
2. Decrease the programmed speed.
3. Increase the programmed speed.
4. Speed limiter On/Pause.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or
Use the speed suggested by the Speed
Limit recognition and recommendation
system.
148
Driving
Adjusting the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation
setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
To modify the limit speed setting from the
current speed of the vehicle:
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
press and hold button 2 or 3.
To modify the limit speed setting using
memorised speeds and from the touch screen:
F press button 5 to display the memorised
speed settings,
F press the button for the desired speed
setting.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
This setting becomes the new limit speed.
To modify the limit speed setting from the
speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
F make a first press on button 5; a message
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
Temporarily exceeding the
programmed speed
F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal,
going beyond the point of resistance, to
exceed the programmed speed limit.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
An audible signal accompanies the flashing
of the programmed speed when exceeding
the speed is not due to an action by the driver
(steep hill, etc.).
As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the
programmed value, the limiter operates again:
the display of the programmed speed becomes
steady again.
Switching off
F Turn wheel 1 to the 0 position. The display
of information related to the speed limiter
disappears.
Malfunction
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
speed limiter.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
On sharp acceleration, as when
descending a steep hill, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle from
exceeding the programmed speed.
An audible signal accompanies the
flashing of the programmed speed when
exceeding the speed is not due to an
action by the driver.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
of the speed limiter.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Cruise control "CRUISE"
System which automatically
maintains the speed of the vehicle
at the value programmed by the
driver, without any action on the
accelerator pedal.
149
6
Driving
Operation of the cruise control requires
a vehicle speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h).
As well as engagement:
- of third gear or higher with a manual
gearbox,
- of second gear or higher in manual mode
with an automatic gearbox,
- of position D with an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control is paused manually by
pressing button 4 or pressing the brake pedal
or if the ESC system is invoked for safety
reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
temporarily by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal until the
programmed cruise speed is reached again.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed setting.
The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
It is recommended that you always keep your feet close
to the pedals.
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
6. Cruise control pause/resume indication.
7. Cruise control selection indication.
8. Value of the speed setting.
For more information on Memorising speeds,
refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation and its
memorisation, refer to the corresponding
section.
Switching on
F Turn wheel 1 to the CRUISE position: cruise
control mode is selected but the function is
paused.
1. Select cruise control mode.
2. Set the current speed as the cruise speed
setting/Reduce the cruise speed setting.
3. Set the current speed as the cruise speed
setting/Increase the cruise speed setting.
4. Pause/Resume cruise control.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or
Use the speed suggested by the sSpeed
Limit recognition and recommendation
system.
150
Driving
Pause
You can temporarily stop the speed limiter by
pressing button 4 again: the display confirms
that it has been stopped (Pause).
Modifying the cruise speed
setting
The cruise control must be active.
To modify the cruise speed setting from the
current speed of the vehicle:
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
press and hold button 2 or 3.
Take care: pressing and holding button
2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the
speed of your vehicle.
As a precaution, it is recommended
that the cruise speed chosen be close
to the current speed of your vehicle, so
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle.
F Press button 2 or 3: your vehicle's current
speed becomes the cruise speed.
The cruise control is activated (ON).
To modify the cruise speed setting using
memorised speed settings and from the touch
screen:
F press button 5 to display the memorised
speed settings,
F press the button for the desired speed
setting.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
This setting becomes the new cruise speed.
To modify the cruise speed setting using
the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation system:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
F make a first press on button 5; a message
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
Exceeding the programmed
speed
If the speed setting is exceeded, the displayed
speed flashes.
The display becomes steady again once the
speed of the vehicle has reached the level of
the speed setting again.
Switching off
F Turn wheel 1 to the 0 position. The display
of information related to the cruise control
disappears.
Operating fault
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
cruise control.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
151
6
Driving
When the cruise control is switched on, be
careful if you maintain the pressure on one
of the programmed speed modification
buttons: this may result in a very rapid
change in the speed of your vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on slippery
roads or in heavy traffic.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
On steep climbs or when towing, the
programmed speed may not be reached
or maintained.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
of the cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that mats are secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Adaptive cruise control
The system allows the speed of
your vehicle to be maintained at the
setting you have made, and also to
respect the inter-vehicle time that
you have selected between your
vehicle and the one in front, when
the situation permits it.
Switching between the
types of cruise control
The choice between "adaptive" and "standard"
cruise control is made in the Driving menu.
F Turn the cruise control wheel to
the "CRUISE" position.
F In the Driving menu, select the Driving
functions tab and then Active cruise
control to activate or deactivate adaptive
cruise control.
For more information on the Cruise
control, refer to the corresponding
section.
Principles of operation
Using radar with a range of about 100 metres,
located at the front of the vehicle, this system
detects a vehicle travelling in front of your
vehicle.
It automatically adapts the speed of your
vehicle to that of the vehicle in front.
If the vehicle in front is travelling more slowly,
the system progressively reduces the speed of
your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the
driver had pressed the "-" button).
If your vehicle is too close to the vehicle in
front or is approaching it too quickly, adaptive
cruise control is automatically deactivated.
The driver is then alerted by an audible signal
accompanied by a message.
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
lane, the adaptive cruise control gradually
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmed speed.
If the driver operates the direction indicator to
the left (left-hand drive) or to the right (right-
hand drive), to overtake a slower vehicle, the
adaptive cruise control allows your vehicle to
temporarily approach the vehicle in front to
assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never
exceeding the programmed speed.
The adaptive cruise control operates
by day and at night, in fog or moderate
rainfall.
152
Driving
The adaptive cruise control uses only
engine braking to slow the vehicle.
Consequently the vehicle loses speed
slowly, as when releasing the accelerator
pedal.
The regulation range is limited: there will
no longer be any adjustment of speed if the
difference between the programmed speed
setting and the speed of the vehicle in front
becomes too high (19 mph (30 km/h)).
If the difference between the programmed
speed setting and the speed of the
vehicle in front is too great, the speed
cannot be adjusted: the cruise control is
automatically deactivated.
General information
The adaptive cruise control is switched on
manually, it requires the speed of the vehicle
to be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 93 mph
(150 km/h) and the engagement of:
- third gear or higher with a manual gearbox,
- second gear in manual mode with an
automatic gearbox,
- position D with an automatic gearbox.
If the cruise speed setting is above
93 mph (150 km/h), the adaptive cruise
control switches to standard cruise control
mode, without automatic regulation of the
inter-vehicle safety distance (a message
appears in the instrument panel).
The adaptive cruise control cannot in any
circumstances replace the observation of
speed limits, nor the need for the vigilance
on the part of the driver.
It is recommended that you always keep
your feet close to the pedals.
The adaptive cruise control can be paused
manually or automatically:
- by pressing button 4,
- by pressing the brake pedal,
- if the ESC system is activated, for safety
reasons,
- if there is an action on the electric parking
brake control,
- when an inter-vehicle time threshold is
reached (calculated according to the relative
speeds of your vehicle and the vehicle
in front and the inter-vehicle time setting
chosen),
- when the distance between your vehicle
and the one in front becomes too short,
The inter-vehicle time setting is
memorised when switching off the ignition.
Steering mounted control
- when the speed of the vehicle in front is too
low,
- when the speed of your vehicle becomes
too low.
1. Select cruise control mode.
2. Use the current speed as the speed
setting/Lower the speed setting.
3. Use the current speed as the speed
setting/Raise the speed setting.
4. Pause/Resume cruise control.
153
6
Driving
Displays on the instrument
panel
Information is grouped together on the
instrument panel.
Operation
Switching on
Adaptive cruise control must be selected in the
Driving menu.
F Turn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position:
cruise control mode is selected but the
function is paused.
F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current
speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise
speed setting.
The cruise control is activated (ON).
By default, the inter-vehicle time is set at
2 seconds.
Otherwise, the last setting made will be used
when switching on the system.
Modication of the cruise speed
F choose a speed setting: it is displayed on
the instrument panel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments. The modification is then accepted.
- by pressing button 5, if your vehicle is
equipped with speed limit recognition:
F the speed to be memorised appears on
the instrument panel.
F press button 5 again to save the speed.
The value appears immediately on the
instrument panel.
For more information on Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation and its
memorisation, refer to the corresponding
section.
As a precaution, it is recommended that
you select a cruise speed setting close to
the current speed of your vehicle.
Changing the inter-vehicle
distance
Press button 6 to select a new inter-vehicle
distance setting from the three levels ("Close",
"Normal", "Distant").
This setting remains memorised, whatever the
state of the system.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or,
Use the speed suggested by the Speed
Limit recognition and recommendation
system.
6. Display and adjustment of the
programmed inter-vehicle distance.
For more information on Memorising speeds,
refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation and its
memorisation, refer to the corresponding
section.
7. Cruise control pause/resume indication.
8. Cruise control selection indication, or
vehicle speed adjustment phase.
9. Value of the programmed speed or
adjusted speed below the programmed
speed.
- using buttons 2 or 3:
F by successive short presses, to change
in steps of + or – 1 mph (km/h),
F by a maintained press, to change in steps
of + or – 5 mph (km/h).
- pressing button 5:
F the six speeds memorised are displayed
in the touch screen,
154
Driving
If a vehicle presence is detected by the
radar and if the speed selected is much
higher than the speed of that vehicle,
the system does not activate and the
alert message "Activation not possible,
conditions unsuitable" is displayed until
the driving conditions are safe to allow
activation of the system.
Exceeding the programmed
setting
It is possible to exceed the speed setting
temporarily by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
Then simply release the accelerator pedal to
return to the programmed speed.
If the programmed setting is unintentionally
exceeded, descending a steep hill for example,
the speed setting in the instrument panel
flashes as a warning.
Driving situations and
associated alerts
The table below describes the alerts and
messages displayed depending on the driving
situation.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
155
6
Driving
Symbol
Display on the
instrument panel
Associated
message
Comments
No vehicle detected:
the system operates as a standard cruise control.
Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar:
the system operates as a standard cruise control.
"SPEED
ADJUSTED"
Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your vehicle's
cruise speed setting.
The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle and then hold it at the speed of the
vehicle in front so as to observe the programmed inter-vehicle time.
The regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the
cruise speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front.
"SPEED
ADJUSTED"
When the adjusted speed reaches the limit of regulation (speed setting – 19 mph
(30 km/h)), the adjusted speed flashes together with the speed setting to signal that
automatic deactivation of the system is imminent.
"Cruise
control
paused".
If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment that it can make and in the absence of
any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change of lane, reduction in
the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused.
The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.
156
Driving
The adaptive cruise control uses only engine
braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the
vehicle loses speed slowly, as when releasing
the accelerator pedal.
The system is paused automatically:
- if the vehicle in front slows down too much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not
brake,
- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
The regulation range is limited to a maximum
difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the
cruise speed setting and the speed of the
vehicle in front. Above this, the system goes into
pause if the safety distance becomes too short.
Poor weather conditions (very heavy
rain, accumulation of snow in front of the
radar) may hinder the operation of the
system, with the display of the operating
fault message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
Reduced visibility". The function remains
unavailable until the message disappears.
Since the radar detection range is relatively
narrow, it is possible that the system cannot
detect:
- vehicles of reduced width, such as
motorcycles, for example,
- vehicles not running in the middle of the
lane,
When the adaptive cruise control is
automatically paused, it can only be
reactivated when safe conditions are
restored. The message "Activation
not possible, conditions unsuitable"
is displayed while reactivation is not
possible.
When the conditions allow, it is
recommended that the function be
reactivated by pressing button 2 or 3,
which will make the current speed of your
vehicle the new cruise speed setting,
rather than by pressing button 4 (on/
pause) which reactivates the cruise control
using the old cruise speed setting, which
may be very different from the current
speed of your vehicle.
Operating limits
- if the system does not slow the vehicle
enough to continue to maintain a safe
distance, for example when descending
a steep hill.
- vehicles entering a corner,
- vehicles changing lane at the last moment.
The cruise control does not take account of:
- stationary vehicles,
- vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction of the adaptive
cruise control system, you are warned by an
audible signal and the display of the message
"Driving aid functions fault".
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
157
6
Driving
When the cruise control is working, take
care if keeping pressed one of the cruise
control programmed speed change
buttons: this can lead to a very rapid
change in the speed of your vehicle.
Do not use adaptive cruise control on
slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
On steep climbs or when towing, the
programmed speed may not be reached
or maintained.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
of the cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that mats are secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Operation of the radar, located in the
front bumper, may be impaired by the
accumulation of dirt (dust, mud, etc.) or in
certain weather conditions (snow, frost,
etc.).
The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
Reduced visibility". is displayed to indicate
that the function is in standby.
Clean the front bumper regularly.
If the front bumper is to be repainted or
retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
paint could interfere with the operation of
the radar.
Adaptive cruise control
until vehicle is stopped/
until 19 mph (30 km/h)
Function until vehicle is stopped: with
automatic gearbox
Function until 19 mph (30 km/h): with manual
gearbox
This system provides the following
functions:
- Automatically maintains the
vehicle at the speed set by the
driver.
- Automatic adjustment of the
distance between your vehicle
and the one in front.
Cruise control remains active after
changing gear regardless of the gearbox
type.
It manages the acceleration and deceleration
of the vehicle by automatically acting on the
engine and the braking system.
With an automatic gearbox, automatic
adjustment of the distance can cause your
vehicle to come to a complete stop.
For this purpose there is a radar installed in the
front bumper.
158
Driving
Primarily designed for driving on main
roads and motorways, this system only
works on moving vehicles, driving in the
same direction as your vehicle.
Principle of operation
The system automatically adapts the speed of
your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to
maintain a constant distance.
If the vehicle in front is driving more slowly, the
system slows or even stops your vehicle, using
engine braking and the braking system (for
versions fitted with an automatic gearbox).
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
lane, the cruise control progressively
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmed speed.
If the driver operates a direction indicator to
overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise control
allows your vehicle to temporarily approach
the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking
manoeuvre, though never exceeding the
programmed speed.
The brake lamps illuminate as soon as
the braking system is activated with
deceleration of the vehicle.
This system is a driving aid that cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the need to
observe speed limits and safety distances,
nor the need for vigilance on the part of
the driver.
Some vehicles present on the road may
not be properly seen or may be poorly
interpreted by the camera and/or radar
(e.g. a lorry), which may lead to a poor
assessment of the distances and lead to
the vehicle inappropriately accelerating or
braking.
The driver must be ready at all times
to retake control of their vehicle by
permanently holding both hands on the
steering wheel and keeping their feet near
the brake and accelerator pedals.
Steering mounted control
1. Select cruise control mode.
2. Use the current speed as the speed
setting/decrease the speed setting.
3. Use the current speed as the speed
setting/increase the speed setting.
4. Pause/Resume cruise control.
5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed
Limit recognition and recommendation.
6. Display and adjustment of the
programmed inter-vehicle distance.
For more information on the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation, refer to
the corresponding section.
Displays in the instrument
panel
7. Indication of the presence/absence of
a target vehicle.
8. Indication of cruise control activation/
deactivation.
9. Value of the speed setting.
159
6
Driving
10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary
(versions fitted with an automatic
gearbox).
11. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation.
Switching on
To switch on the cruise control
F With the engine running, turn the wheel
1 to the "CRUISE" position. The system is
paused (grey display).
With a manual gearbox
With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and
99 mph (30 and 160 km/h):
F When the vehicle is moving, press one of
the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your
vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting.
The cruise control starts operating (displayed
in green).
With an automatic gearbox
Mode D or M must be selected.
With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and
112 mph (30 and 180 km/h):
Remembering the settings
Switching off the ignition cancels any speed
setting value chosen by the driver.
By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set
at "Normal" (2 dashes). Otherwise, the last
setting made will be used when switching on
the system.
Pause
• When changing from mode D to N with an
automatic gearbox.
- or automatically:
• If the ESC system is activated, for safety
reasons.
• When the speed of the vehicle falls below
19 mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox.
When the cruise control is paused, it
can only be reactivated when all of the
safety conditions are met. The message
"Activation not possible, conditions
unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation
is not possible.
As soon as a vehicle is detected, the symbol
7 is filled with the colour associated with the
cruise control mode. By default, the symbol 7 is
empty.
When the cruise control is in operation, the
symbols 7 and 8 are displayed in green. By
default, they are displayed in grey.
Reactivating the function
Versions fitted with a manual gearbox
To reactivate the function, the driver must
accelerate to reach at least 19 mph (30 km/h),
then press one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4.
Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox
Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to
a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle
stationary; the cruise control is paused.
12. Inter-vehicle distance setting.
13. Position of vehicle detected by the radar.
This information is visible in the instrument
panel in "DRIVING" display mode.
F When the vehicle is moving, press one of
the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your
vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting.
The cruise control can be paused manually by:
- action by the driver:
• On the button 4 (Pause).
• On the brake pedal.
• On the electric parking brake control.
• On the clutch pedal, by pressing and
holding for more than 5 seconds.
160
Driving
As a safety measure, wait until the current
speed approaches the speed setting to
reactivate the function by pressing button 4.
Modification of the speed
setting
With the engine running and cruise control on
(green), you can modify the speed setting.
Modication from the current
speed
F By successive short presses on button 2 or
3, to lower or raise the setting in steps of +
or – 1 mph (km/h),
F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3, to
lower or raise the setting in steps of + or –
5 mph (km/h).
Take care: pressing and holding button
2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the
speed of your vehicle.
Modication from the
Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation system
F The suggested speed is displayed in the
instrument panel.
F Make an initial press on button 5; a
message is displayed to confirm the
memorisation request.
F Press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
For more information on the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation, refer to
the corresponding section.
The driver should press the accelerator pedal
to move off, then reactivate the system above
19 mph (30 km/h) by pressing button 2, 3 or 4.
If the driver takes no action following this
immobilisation, the electric parking brake is
applied automatically after a while (approx. five
minutes).
As a precaution, it is recommended
that you select a cruise speed close to
the current speed of your vehicle, so
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle.
Modification of the programmed
inter-vehicle distance
Engine running and with the wheel at the
"CRUISE" position:
F Press button 6 to display the selection
screen for inter-vehicle distance.
F By pressing button 6 repeatedly, cycle
through the predefined settings.
The selection screen closes after a few
seconds.
The modification is then accepted.
This setting remains in memory, whatever the
state of the system and when the ignition is
switched off.
The selection also applies to the stopping
distance (versions with EAT6 and
EAT8 automatic gearbox).
Three threshold settings are suggested for the
inter-vehicle distance:
- "Distant" (3 dashes),
- "Normal" (2 dashes),
- "Close" (1 dash).
161
6
Driving
Exceeding the programmed
setting
It is possible to exceed the speed setting
temporarily by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control no longer manages the
braking system during this period.
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
to the programmed speed.
If the programmed speed setting is exceeded,
the display of the speed setting disappears
and a message "Cruise control suspended"
is displayed until the accelerator pedal is
released.
Driving situations and
associated alerts
To benefit from all necessary information on
the instrument panel, you must select the
"DRIVING" display mode beforehand.
The table below describes the alerts and
messages displayed depending on the driving
situation.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments
(grey)
"Cruise control paused" System paused.
No vehicle detected.
(grey)
"Cruise control paused" System paused.
A vehicle has been
detected.
(green)
according to
the inter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control on" System activated.
No vehicle detected.
(green)
according to
the inter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control on" System activated.
A vehicle has been
detected.
or
(green)
"Cruise control
suspended"
System activated.
The driver has
temporarily taken
control of the vehicle by
accelerating.
162
70
70
Driving
Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments
(green)
+
(orange)
"Take back control of the
vehicle"
The driver must take
back control of the
vehicle by accelerating
or braking, depending on
the circumstances.
(green)
+
(red)
"Take back control of the
vehicle"
The system cannot
manage the critical
situation alone
(emergency braking of
the target vehicle, rapid
insertion of another
vehicle between the two
vehicles).
The driver must
immediately take back
control of the vehicle.
or
(grey)
(orange)
"Activation not possible,
conditions unsuitable"
The system refuses
to activate the cruise
control (speed outside
the operating range,
winding road).
163
6
Driving
Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments
or
(grey)/(green)
according to
the inter-vehicle
distance selected
and the actual
distance from the
target vehicle
"Cruise control paused"
(for a few seconds)
The system has brought
the vehicle to a complete
stop and is holding it
immobilised.
The driver must
accelerate to move off
again.
The cruise control
remains paused until the
driver reactivates it.
Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to
a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle
stationary; the cruise control is paused.
The driver should press the accelerator
pedal to move off, then reactivate the
system by pressing one of buttons 2, 3 or
4. If the driver takes no action following this
immobilisation, the electric parking brake is
applied automatically after a while (approx. five
minutes).
Operating limits
The system cannot exceed the limits of the
laws of physics.
The system cannot deal with certain situations
and the driver has to take back control of the
vehicle.
Cases of non-detection by the radar:
- Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals.
- Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown,
etc.).
When the driver must suspend the cruise
control system:
Cases where the driver is urged to take
back control immediately:
- Excessively sharp deceleration of the
vehicle in front of you.
Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox
- Vehicles in a tight bend.
- When approaching a roundabout.
- When following a narrow vehicle.
Reactivate cruise control when conditions
permit.
- Vehicles crossing your lane.
- Oncoming vehicles.
- When a vehicle cuts in sharply between
your vehicle and the one in front.
164
Driving
The system must not be activated in the
following situations:
- When the "space-saver" spare wheel is
being used (depending on version).
- When towing.
- Following an impact on the front bumper.
Be particularly careful:
- When motorcycles are present and
when there are vehicles staggered
onto the traffic lane.
- When you enter a tunnel or cross
a bridge.
The cruise control operates by day and
night, in fog or moderate rainfall.
However, it is strongly recommended
that you always adapt your speed and
your safety distance from vehicles ahead
according to the driving conditions, the
weather and the road surface.
Use the cruise control only where
the driving conditions allow running
at a constant speed and keeping an
adequate safety distance.
Do not activate the cruise control in urban
areas where pedestrians are likely to
cross the road, in heavy traffic, on winding
or steep roads, on slippery or flooded
roads, when there is snowfall, if the front
bumper is damaged or when the brake
lamps have failed.
In certain circumstances, it may not
be possible for the speed setting to be
maintained or even reached: loaded
vehicle, ascending a steep hill, etc.
The system is not intended for the
following situations:
- the front end of the vehicle has been
modified (addition of long-range
headlamps, painting of the front
bumper),
- driving on a racing track,
- driving on a rolling road,
- use of snow chains, non-slip covers or
studded tyres.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
of the cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is secured
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
165
6
Driving
Clean the front bumper regularly.
If the front bumper is to be repainted or
retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
paint could interfere with the operation of
the radar.
Malfunction
If the cruise control
malfunctions, dashes are
displayed instead of the
cruise control speed setting.
If this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an
alert message and an
audible signal, this confirms
a malfunction.
The adaptive cruise control deactivates
automatically if the use of a "space-saver"
type spare wheel is detected or if there is
a malfunction on the lateral brake lamps or
trailer brake lamps (for approved trailers).
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it
from working:
- poor visibility (inadequate street
lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense
fog, etc.),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light, etc.),
- camera or radar masked (mud, frost,
snow, condensation, etc.).
In these situations, detection performance
may be reduced.
The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
Reduced visibility". is displayed to indicate
that the function is in standby.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Active Safety Brake with
Collision Risk Alert and
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance
The system allows:
- the driver to be warned that their vehicle is
at risk of collision with the vehicle in front,
- a collision to be prevented, or its severity to
be limited, by reducing the vehicle's speed.
This system is a driving aid that includes three
functions:
- Collision Risk Alert (alert if there is a risk of
collision),
- Intelligent emergency braking assistance,
- Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
braking).
166
Driving
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of
the windscreen, and, depending on the version,
a radar located in the front bumper.
This system is designed to assist the
driver and improve road safety.
It is the driver's responsibility to
continuously monitor the state of the
traffic, observing the driving regulations.
This system does not replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
As soon as the system detects a potential
obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in
case automatic braking is needed. This
may cause a slight noise and a slight
sensation of deceleration.
Deactivation/Activation
By default, the system is automatically
activated at every engine start.
The system can be deactivated or activated via
the vehicle settings menu.
Deactivation of the system is
signalled by the illumination of this
indicator lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message.
Operating conditions and
limits
The ESC system must not be faulty.
The ASR must not be deactivated.
All passenger seat belts must be fastened.
Driving at a steady speed on roads with few
bends is required.
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it
from working:
- poor visibility (inadequate street
lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense
fog, etc.),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light, etc.),
- camera or radar obstructed (mud, frost,
snow, condensation, etc.).
On versions with camera alone, this
message indicates to you that the camera
is obstructed: "Driving aids camera:
visibility limited, see user guide".
In these situations, detection performance
may be reduced.
167
6
Driving
In the following cases, deactivating the system
via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised:
- towing a trailer,
- carrying long objects on roof bars or roof
rack,
- with snow chains fitted,
- before using an automatic car wash, with
the engine running,
- before placing the vehicle on a rolling road
in a workshop,
- towed vehicle, engine running,
- damaged front bumper (version with radar),
- following impact to the windscreen close to
the detection camera.
The system is automatically deactivated
after the use of the "space-saver" type
spare wheel is detected, or if a fault with
the lateral brake lamps is detected.
It is possible that warnings are not given,
are given too late or seem unjustified.
Consequently, always stay in control of
your vehicle and be prepared to react at
any time to avoid an accident.
After an impact, the function automatically
stops operating. Contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
system checked.
If the front bumper is to be repainted or
retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
paint could interfere with the operation of
the radar.
Collision Risk Alert
It warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of
collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian
present in their traffic lane.
Modifying the alert trigger
threshold
This threshold determines how you wish
to be alerted of the presence of a moving
or stationary vehicle in front of you, or
a pedestrian present in your traffic lane.
The current threshold can only be
modified via the touch screen's
Driving menu.
You can select one of three predefined
thresholds:
- "Distant",
- "Normal",
- "Close".
The last threshold selected is kept in memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Operation
Depending on the degree of risk of collision
detected by the system and the alert threshold
chosen by the driver, different levels of
alert can be triggered and displayed in the
instrument panel.
Clean the windscreen regularly,
particularly the area in front of the camera.
The internal surface of the windscreen can
also become misted around the camera.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
conceal the detection camera.
Clean the front bumper, especially around
the radar, removing mud, snow, etc.
168
Driving
These levels of alert are based on the inter-
vehicle time between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
They take account of the vehicle dynamics,
the speed of your vehicle and the one in front,
the environmental conditions, the operation of
the vehicle (cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to
trigger the alert at the best moment.
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only,
signalling to you that the vehicle in
front is very close.
The message "Vehicle close" is
displayed.
Level 2 (red): visual and audible
alert, warning you that a collision is
imminent.
The message "Brake!" is displayed.
Where the speed of your vehicle is too fast
approaching another vehicle, the first level
of alert may not be displayed: the level
2 alert may be displayed directly.
Important: alert level 1 is never displayed
when the "Close" trigger threshold has
been selected.
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance
If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
a collision, this system will supplement the
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
This assistance will only be provided if you
press the brake pedal.
Active Safety Brake
This function, also called automatic emergency
braking, intervenes following the alert if the
driver does not react quickly enough and does
not operate the vehicle's brakes.
It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid
a frontal collision by your vehicle where the
driver fails to react.
Operation
The system operates under the following
conditions:
- The vehicle's speed does not exceed
37 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is
detected.
- The vehicle's speed does not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle
is detected.
- The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and
53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions
with camera alone) or 87 mph (140 km/h)
(versions with camera and radar) when
a moving vehicle is detected.
If the camera and/or radar have
confirmed the presence of a vehicle
or a pedestrian, this warning lamp
flashes once the function is acting
on the vehicle's brakes.
With an automatic gearbox, in the event of
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
comes to a complete stop, keep the brake
pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from
starting off again.
With a manual gearbox, in the event of
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall.
169
6
Driving
The driver can maintain control of the
vehicle at any time by sharply turning
the steering wheel and/or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Operation of the function may be felt by
slight vibration in the brake pedal.
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
the automatic braking is maintained for
1 to 2 seconds.
Malfunction
In the event of a fault with the
system, you are alerted by the
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by the display of
a message and an audible signal.
Lane Departure Warning
System
Using a camera located at the top of the
windscreen to identify lane markings on the
ground, the system corrects the trajectory of
the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects
a risk of involuntary crossing of a line.
This system is particularly useful on motorways
and main roads.
Conditions for operation
The speed of the vehicle must be between
40 mph and 112 mph (65 km/h and 180 km/h).
The driver must hold the steering wheel with
both hands.
The change of trajectory must not be
accompanied by operation of the direction
indicators.
The ESC system must be activated and fault-
free.
This system is a driving aid that cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the
driver's own vigilance. The driver must
remain in control of the vehicle under all
circumstances.
The system helps the driver only when
there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily
wandering from the lane it is being driven
in. It does not manage the safe driving
distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
brakes.
The driver must hold the steering wheel
with both hands in a way that allows
control to be maintained in circumstances
where the system is not able to intervene
(if lane markings disappear, for example).
It is necessary to observe the driving
regulations and take a break every two
hours.
Operation
Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle
involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
detected, it makes the correction to the
trajectory required to return the vehicle to its
initial path.
The driver will notice a turning movement of the
steering wheel.
This warning lamp flashes during
trajectory correction.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
170
Driving
If the driver wishes to maintain the
trajectory of the vehicle, they can prevent
the correction by keeping a firm grip on
the wheel (during an avoiding manoeuvre,
for example).
The correction is interrupted if the
direction indicators are operated.
While the direction indicators are on and for
a few seconds after switching them off, the
system considers that any change of trajectory
is voluntary and no correction is triggered
during this period.
However, with the Blind Spot Detection system
activated, if the driver starts changing lanes
and another vehicle is detected in the vehicle's
blind spot, the system will correct the trajectory
of the vehicle even though the direction
indicators are on.
For more information on the Blind Spot
Detection, refer to the corresponding section.
If the system detects that the driver is not
holding the wheel firmly enough during
an automatic correction of trajectory,
it interrupts the correction. An alert is
triggered to encourage the driver to take
back control of the vehicle.
Driving situations and
associated alerts
To benefit from all necessary information on
the instrument panel, you must previously
select the "DRIVING" display mode.
The table below describes the alerts and
messages displayed depending on the driving
situation.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
171
6
Driving
Status of the
function
Indicator
lamp
Display and/
or associated
message
Comments
OFF
(grey)
System deactivated.
ON
(grey)
System active, conditions not met:
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
- no lane marking recognised,
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered,
- "sporty" driving.
ON
(grey)
Automatic deactivation/standby of the system (for example: detection of a trailer, use of the
"space-saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle).
Status of the
function
Indicator
lamp
Display and/
or associated
message
Comments
ON
(green)
Detection of lane markings.
Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
ON
(orange)/(green)
The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of involuntary crossing is
detected (orange line).
ON
(orange)/(green)
"Take control of the
vehicle".
- If, during correction, the system detects that the driver has not held the wheel for a few
seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to the driver.
- During correction of the trajectory, if the system determines that the correction will not be
enough and that a solid line is crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must
complete the correction of the trajectory.
172
Driving
Deactivation of the system is recommended in
the following situations:
- driving on a road surface in poor condition,
- poor weather conditions,
- driving on slippery surfaces (ice).
Activation/Deactivation
Activation and deactivation of the system is
done in the Driving menu of the touch screen.
Select the "Driving functions" then the "Lane
assist" tab.
The system state remains in memory when the
ignition is switched off.
Malfunction
Operating limits
The system goes into standby automatically in
the following cases:
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered,
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater
than 112 mph (180 km/h),
- connected electrically to a trailer,
- use of the "space-saver" spare
wheel detected (as detection is not
immediate, deactivation of the system is
recommended),
- dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
the brake or accelerator pedal,
- driving where there are no lane markings,
- activation of the direction indicators,
- crossing the inside line on a bend,
- driving in a tight corner,
- inactivity by the driver detected during
correction.
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it
working:
- conditions of poor visibility (inadequate
street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light),
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker,
- lane markings worn, hidden (snow,
mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.),
- running close to the vehicle in front
(the lane markings may not be
detected),
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc.
Risk of undesirable operation
The system is not intended for driving in the
following situations:
- driving on a speed circuit,
- driving with a trailer,
- driving on a rolling stand,
- driving on unstable surfaces.
In the event of a fault with the system, you are
alerted by the illumination of these warning
lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
the display of a message and an audible signal.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
173
6
Driving
Blind Spot Detection
This system warns the driver of the presence
of another vehicle in the blind spots of their
vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field
of vision), as soon as this presents a potential
danger.
A fixed warning lamp appears in the door mirror
on the side in question:
- immediately, when being overtaken,
- after a delay of about one second, when
overtaking a vehicle slowly.
This driving aid system is designed to
improve safety when driving and is in no
circumstances a substitute for the use
of the interior rear view mirror and door
mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to
constantly check the traffic, to assess the
relative distances and speeds of other
vehicles and to predict their movements
before deciding whether to change lane.
This system is a driving aid that cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
Activation/Deactivation
The function is activated and
deactivated in the Driving menu of
the touch screen.
When the function is activated,
this indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel.
The state of the system stays in memory when
switching off the ignition.
The system is automatically deactivated
when towing with a towing device
approved by CITROËN.
Operation
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
monitor the blind spots.
The alert is given by an orange warning lamp
coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon
as a vehicle – car, lorry, cycle – is detected.
The following conditions must be met for this:
- all vehicles are moving in the same direction
and in adjacent lanes,
- the speed of the vehicle must be between
7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
- you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
- the traffic is flowing normally,
- overtaking a vehicle over a certain period
of time and the vehicle being overtaken
remains in the blind spot,
- you are driving on a straight or slightly
curved road,
- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a
caravan, etc.
174
Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the
system, this warning lamp flashes
for a few moments in the instrument
panel, accompanied by the Service
warning lamp coming on and the
display of a message.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
The system may suffer temporary
interference in certain weather conditions
(rain, hail, etc.).
In particular, driving on a wet surface or
the transition from a dry area to a wet area
can cause false alerts (e.g. the presence
of water droplets in the blind spot is
interpreted as a vehicle).
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
sensors are not covered with mud, ice or
snow.
Take care not to cover the warning zone in
the door mirrors or the detection zones on
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
labels or other objects; they may hamper
the correct operation of the system.
High pressure jet wash
When washing your vehicle, keep the
nozzle at a minimum distance of 12 inches
(30 cm) from the sensors.
No alert will be given in the following situations:
- in the presence of non-moving objects
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps,
road signs, etc.),
- with vehicles moving in the opposite
direction,
- driving on a winding road or a sharp corner,
- when overtaking or being overtaken by
a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which
is both detected in the rear blind spot and
present in the driver's front field of vision,
- when overtaking quickly,
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
front and behind are confused with a lorry or
a stationary object,
- if the Park Assist function is activated.
175
6
Driving
Active Blind Spot
Monitoring System
(depending on version)
In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door
mirror on the side in question, a correction of
trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking
with the direction indicators on, to help you
avoid a collision.
Conditions for operation
The following systems must be activated:
- Blind Spot Detection,
- Lane Departure Warning System.
The speed of the vehicle must be between
40 and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) inclusive.
Fatigue detection system
Take a break as soon as you feel tired or at
least every two hours.
Depending on version, the function relies either
on the "Driver Attention Warning" system alone
or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert"
system.
These systems cannot in any circumstances
replace the need for vigilance on the part
of the driver who must remain in control
of their decisions. In no case can these
systems keep the driver awake or prevent
them from falling asleep at the wheel.
It is the driver's responsibility to stop if they
feel tired.
Activation/Deactivation
These functions are activated and
deactivated in the Driving menu of
the touch screen.
The state of the system stays in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Driver Attention Warning
The system triggers an alert once it
detects that the driver has not taken
a break after two hours of driving at
a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
This alert is issued via the display of
a message encouraging you to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
stopped.
The system resets itself if one of the following
conditions is met:
- engine running, the vehicle has been
stationary for more than 15 minutes,
- the ignition has been switched off for a few
minutes,
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
door is open.
As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops
below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes
into standby.
The driving time is counted again once the
speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).
Driver Attention Alert
Depending on version, the "Driver Attention
Warning" may be combined with the "Driver
Attention Alert".
176
Driving
Using a camera placed at the top
of the windscreen, the system
assesses the driver's level of
vigilance by identifying variations
in trajectory compared to the lane
markings.
This system is particularly suited to fast roads
(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).
When the system interprets the behaviour of
the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or
inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it
triggers the first level of alert.
The driver is then alerted by the message
"Take care!", accompanied by an audible
signal.
After three first level alerts, the system triggers
a new alert with the message "Take a break!",
accompanied by a more pronounced audible
signal.
In certain driving conditions (poor road
surface or strong winds), the system may
give alerts independent of the driver's
level of vigilance.
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it
working:
- poor visibility (inadequate lighting of
the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain,
dense fog, etc.),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light, etc.),
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera dirty, misted up, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker,
- lane markings absent, worn, hidden
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks,
etc.),
- close to the vehicle ahead (lane
markings not detected),
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc.
Clean the windscreen regularly,
particularly the area in front of the camera.
The internal surface of the windscreen can
also become misted around the camera.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
conceal the detection camera.
Clean the front bumper, especially around
the radar, removing mud, snow, etc.
Parking sensors
Using sensors located in the bumper, this
function warns of the proximity of obstacles
(e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) entering
their field of detection.
177
6
Driving
This function is a manoeuvring aid which
cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must remain attentive and stay
in control of their vehicle.
They must always check the vehicle's
surroundings before undertaking
a manoeuvre.
During the entire manoeuvre, the driver
must ensure that the space remains clear.
Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse
gear.
This is confirmed by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you come out
of reverse gear.
Audible assistance
The information on proximity is given by an
intermittent sound signal, the succession of
which becomes more rapid as the vehicle
approaches the obstacle.
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
indicates which side the obstacle is on.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
Visual assistance
It supplements the audible signal by displaying
bars on the screen that move progressively
nearer to the vehicle (white: more distant
obstacles; orange: close obstacles; red: very
close obstacles).
When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger"
symbol is displayed on the screen.
Front parking sensors
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the
front parking sensors are triggered when an
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
the vehicle remains below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The front parking sensors are interrupted if
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
in forward gear, if no further obstacles are
detected or when the speed of the vehicle
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
The sound emitted by the speaker (front or
rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in
front or behind.
Deactivation/Activation
The function is deactivated and
activated in the Driving menu of the
touch screen.
This warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel when the function
is deactivated.
A new selection reactivates the
function.
The state of the function stays in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
178
Driving
The rear parking sensors system will
be deactivated automatically if a trailer
or bicycle carrier is connected to
a towing device installed in line with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
In this case, the outline of a trailer is
displayed at the rear of the image of the
vehicle.
The parking sensors are deactivated while the
Park Assist system is measuring a space.
For more information on the Park Assist, refer
to the corresponding section.
Operating limits
- A front or rear impact to the vehicle can
distort the settings of the sensors, which is
not always detected by the system: distance
measurements may be incorrect.
- The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is
very loaded can affect the distance
measurements.
- The sensors may be affected by poor
weather conditions (heavy rain, thick fog,
snowfall, etc.).
Operating fault
If the system fails, when reverse
gear is engaged this warning lamp
flashes for a few seconds before
lighting up continuously, together
with the Service warning lamp.
A message appears, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
sensors are not covered by mud, ice or
snow.
When reverse gear is engaged, an audible
signal (long beep) indicates that the
sensors may be dirty.
Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
the audible signals of the parking sensor
system.
High pressure jet wash
When washing your vehicle, direct the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
sensors.
- Certain obstacles located in the sensors'
blind spots may not be detected or no
longer be detected during the manoeuvre.
- Sounds such as those emitted by noisy
vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries,
pneumatic drills, etc.) may interfere with the
vehicle's sensors.
- Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
- Accumulated snow or dead leaves on the
road surface can interfere with the vehicle's
sensors.
Reversing camera
The reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
179
6
Driving
The reversing camera function may be
supplemented with parking sensors.
The reversing camera cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
They are represented by lines marked
"on the ground" and do not allow you to
determine the position of tall obstacles (for
example: other vehicles, etc.) relative to
the vehicle.
Some distortion of the image is normal.
It is normal to have a part of the number
plate showing in the bottom of the screen.
The blue lines 1 represent the general direction
of the vehicle (the gap represents the width of
your vehicle except for the door mirrors).
The red line 2 represents a distance of about
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
bumper.
The green lines 3 represent distances of about
one and two metres beyond the edge of your
vehicle's rear bumper.
The turquoise blue curves 4 represent the
maximum turning circle.
Opening the tailgate causes the display to
disappear.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
using a soft, dry cloth.
High pressure jet wash
When washing your vehicle, do not direct
the lance from less than 30 cm from the
lens of the camera.
Depending on version, the image is displayed
on the touch screen or the instrument panel.
The representation with overlaid lines helps the
manoeuvre.
Vision 360
This system allows the near surroundings of
the vehicle to be viewed in the instrument panel
using cameras.
They are situated at the front and rear of the
vehicle, as well as under the door mirrors.
Depending on the angle of view chosen (front
view, rear view or 360° panoramic view), the
Vision 360 system provides a specific visual aid
in particular driving conditions, such as when
entering a blind crossroads or manoeuvring in
areas with reduced visibility.
Once activated, this function is operational up
to 9 mph (15 km/h). Above 19 mph (30 km/h),
the system deactivates automatically.
180
Driving
This system is a visual aid that cannot in
any circumstances replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
The images provided by the camera(s)
may be distorted by the relief. The
presence of areas in shadow, bright
sunlight, or poor lighting conditions may
make the image dark and reduce contrast.
Forward vision
The camera situated on the front bumper is
activated and the views of the area to the
front left and the area to the front right of your
vehicle appear simultaneously in the instrument
panel.
Rear vision
The camera situated on the tailgate is activated
and the view of the area behind your vehicle is
displayed in the instrument panel and behaves
as a reversing camera, regardless of the
position of the gear selector.
The blue outline represents the width of
your vehicle (without mirrors): its orientation
depends on the position of the steering wheel.
The red line represents the distance of 30 cm)
from the rear bumper and the two green lines
the distances of 1 m and 2 m respectively from
the rear bumper.
The rear vision is displayed automatically
when reverse gear is engaged, regardless
of the state of the system.
Vision 360
The cameras situated on the front and rear
bumpers as well as those below the door
mirrors activate and a view from above of your
vehicle in its close environment is generated
and is displayed in the instrument panel.
Opening a door or the tailgate will disrupt the
360 and rear views.
Installation of the very cold climate screen will
alter the image transmitted by the front camera.
181
6
Driving
Operation
Function activation
On display of the menu, select one of the three
views:
"Front camera".
"360 camera".
"Rear camera".
The selected view comes up in the instrument
panel.
The display disappears from the
instrument panel above 9 mph (15 km/h).
Function deactivation
F Accelerate to over 19 mph (30 km/h).
Check the cleanliness of the camera
lenses regularly.
High pressure jet wash
When washing your vehicle, keep the
nozzle at least 12 inches (30 cm) from the
cameras.
With the engine running:
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab, then "Panoramic visual aid".
or
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab, then "Panoramic visual aid".
F Select "Camera OFF".
Park Assist
This system provides active assistance with
parking: it detects a parking space then
operates the steering system to park in this
space.
With a manual gearbox, the driver manages
the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch.
With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the
driver manages the accelerator, brakes and
gears.
During phases of entry into and exit from
a parking space, the system provides visual
and audible information to the driver in order
to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be
necessary to move forwards and backwards
more than once.
The driver can take control at any time by
gripping the steering wheel.
This manoeuvring assistance system
cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must remain in control of their
vehicle ensuring that the space remains
clear throughout the manoeuvre.
In some circumstances, the sensors may
not detect small obstacles located in their
blind spots.
The Park Assist system cannot work with
the engine off.
A. Parallel parking.
B. Exit from a parallel parking space.
C. Bay parking.
The Park Assist system provides assistance for
the following manoeuvres:
182
Driving
During manoeuvring phases, the steering
wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold
the steering wheel, do not put your hands
between the spokes of the steering wheel.
Watch out for any object that could block
the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarves,
ties, etc.) - injury risk!
When the Park Assist is active, it prevents
the Stop & Start going into STOP mode.
In STOP mode, activating Park Assist
restarts the engine.
The Park Assist system takes control
of the assistance for a maximum of
4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is
deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you
think that your vehicle is not positioned
correctly, you should then take control of
the steering to carry out the manoeuvre.
The sequence of manoeuvres and the
driving instructions are displayed in the
instrument panel.
You should always check the surroundings
of your vehicle before starting
a manoeuvre.
The parking sensors function is
not available during parking space
measurement. It intervenes later when
manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle
is approaching an obstacle: the audible
signal becomes continuous when the
obstacle is less than thirty centimetres
away.
If you have deactivated the parking
sensors, they are automatically
reactivated during assisted parking
manoeuvres.
Activation of Park Assist deactivates the
Blind Spot Detection.
Operation
Assistance with parallel parking
manoeuvres
F When you have found a parking space.
F Press this button.
The assistance is activated:
the display of this symbol and
a speed limit indicate that
the steering manoeuvres are
controlled by the system: do not
touch the steering wheel.
The assistance is deactivated:
the display of this symbol
indicates that the steering
manoeuvres are no longer
controlled by the system:
you must take control of the
steering.
183
6
Driving
This indicator lamp comes on in
the instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the system.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Enter parallel parking
space" on the touch screen.
To enter a parking space, the system does
not identify spaces that are clearly smaller
or larger than the vehicle.
F Operate the direction indicator on the
parking side chosen to activate the
measurement function. You should drive at
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
the row of parked vehicles.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until
the system finds a free space.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is
displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
(7 km/h).
184
Driving
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move
forwards and backwards, aided by the
warnings from the "Parking sensors"
system, until the end of the manoeuvre is
indicated.
Assistance in exiting a parallel
parking space
F When you want to leave a parallel parking
space, start the engine.
F With the vehicle stationary,
press this button.
This indicator lamp comes on in
the instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the system.
F Press "Exit parking space" on
the touch screen.
F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator
lamp in the instrument panel goes off,
accompanied by a message and an audible
signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
(5 km/h), move forwards and backwards,
aided by the warnings from the "Parking
sensors" system, until the indication of the
end of the manoeuvre.
F Operate the direction indicator for the exit
side chosen.
F Engage reverse or forward gear and release
the steering wheel.
The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
front wheels are clear of the parking space.
185
6
Driving
Assistance with bay parking
manoeuvres
F Once you have found a parking
area, press this button.
This indicator lamp comes on in
the instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the system.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Enter bay parking
space" on the touch screen.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until
the system finds a free space.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control.
F Operate the direction indicator on the
parking side chosen to activate the
measurement function. You should drive at
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
the row of parked vehicles.
When several successive bays are found,
the vehicle will be directed towards the
last one.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is
displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
(7 km/h).
186
Driving
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the
"Parking sensors" system, until the end of
the manoeuvre is indicated.
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park
Assist system is automatically deactivated
once the rear of the vehicle is within
20 inches (50 cm) of an obstacle.
During parking and exit from parking
manoeuvres, the reversing camera
function may come into operation. It
facilitates monitoring of the surroundings
of the vehicle, by displaying additional
information in the instrument panel.
For more information on the Reversing
camera, refer to the corresponding
section.
Deactivation
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
stated limit,
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
steering wheel,
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
- on opening the driver's door,
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
obstacle.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes
off and a message is displayed accompanied
by an audible signal.
The driver should then take back control of the
vehicle's steering.
If the system is deactivated during
a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate
it to repeat the measurement.
Switching off
The system is switched off automatically:
- when towing a trailer, connected electrically,
- if the driver's door is opened,
- if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph
(70 km/h).
To switch the system off for a prolonged period,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control.
The system is deactivated by pressing the
control.
The system is deactivated automatically:
- on switching off the ignition,
- if the engine stalls,
- if no manoeuvre is performed within
5 minutes of selecting the type of
manoeuvre
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
a manoeuvre,
- if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is
triggered,
187
6
Driving
Operating faults
In the event of a fault, this warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds,
accompanied by an audible signal.
In the event of a fault with the
power steering, this warning lamp
is displayed in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle
and the space is too great, the system may
not be able to measure the space.
Any object projecting beyond the dimensions
of the vehicle (e.g. a ladder on the roof or
a towball) will not be taken into account by
the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that
the sensors are not covered by dirt, ice or
snow.
In the event of a fault, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
High pressure jet washing
When washing your vehicle, keep the lance at
least 12 inches (30 cm) away from the sensors.
If the fault occurs during the use of the system,
the warning lamp goes off.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ
LUBRICANTS
For more than 45 years, TOTAL
and CITROËN have shared common
values: excellence, creativity and
technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has
developed a range of TOTAL QUARTZ
lubricants adapted to CITROËN
engines, making them even more
fuel efficient and protective of the
environment.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the
reliability and the performance of their
products during motorsport races in
extreme conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants
to maintain your vehicle, this is your
assurance of optimum durability and
performance from your engine.
FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
7
189
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels
that conform to current and future European
standards and which can be obtained from
filling stations:
Petrol that meets standard EN228,
mixed with a biofuel that meets
standard EN15376.
The only petrol additives authorised
for use are those that meet the
B715001 standard.
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with
biofuels that conform to current and future
European standards and which can be
obtained from filling stations:
Diesel fuel that meets standard
EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that
meets standard EN14214 (possibly
containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester).
Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel
that meets standard EN14214 (possibly
containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester).
B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard
EN16709 can be used in your Diesel
engine. However, this use, even
occasional, requires strict application of
the special servicing conditions referred
to as "Arduous conditions".
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Diesel fuel that meets standard
EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets
standard EN14214 (possibly containing
up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel
system).
The only Diesel additives authorised
for use are those that meet the
B715000 standard.
Diesel at low temperature
At temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the
formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel
fuels could result in an abnormal operation
of the fuel supply circuit. To avoid this, we
recommend using winter-type Diesel fuel and
keeping the fuel tank more than 50% full.
If, despite this, at temperatures below -15°C
(+5°F) the engine has problems starting,
just leave the vehicle in a garage or heated
workshop for a little while.
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage your vehicle's
engine.
In certain countries, the use of a particular
fuel may be required (specific octane rating,
specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct
operation of the engine.
For any additional information, contact a dealer.
190
Practical information
Fuel
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 57 litres
(petrol) or 55 litres (Diesel).
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level is reached,
this warning lamp in the instrument
panel comes on, accompanied by
an audible warning, a message and
the last bar of the fuel gauge lights
up orange.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this
warning lamp appears every time the ignition
is switched on, accompanied by an audible
warning and a message. This audible warning
and this message are repeated with increasing
frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0".
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
out.
Refilling
A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the
filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use,
depending on your engine.
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
To refuel in complete safety:
F You must switch off the engine.
F With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear
edge of the flap to open it (the filler cap is
a part of it).
F Take care to select the pump that delivers
the correct type of fuel for your vehicle.
F Insert the nozzle so as to push in the metal
non-return flap.
F Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as
far as possible before starting to refuel (risk
of blowback).
If you are filling your tank to the top, do not
continue after the 3
rd
cut-off of the nozzle;
this could cause malfunctions.
Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
a device which helps to reduce the level of
harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
The filler neck is narrower, allowing only
unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
your vehicle, you must have the fuel
tank drained and filled with the correct
fuel before starting the engine.
Fuel cut-off
Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that
cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an
impact.
Opening the filler flap may create a noise
caused by an inrush of air. This is entirely
normal and results from the sealing of the fuel
system.
F Hold it in this position throughout the filling
operation.
F Push the filler flap to close it.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
engine in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the "START/STOP"
button.
7
191
Practical information
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)
(Depending on the country of sale.)
Mechanical device which prevents filling the
tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps
avoid the risk of engine damage that can result
from filling with the wrong fuel.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill
the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in
direct contact with the flap of the misfuel
prevention device and pour slowly.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
different in other countries, the presence
of the misfuel prevention device may make
refuelling impossible.
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the CITROËN dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
fuel pumps in the country in which you
intend to travel.
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into
the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains
improve traction as well as the
behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
Snow chains must be fitted only to the
front wheels. They must never be fitted to
"space-saver" type spare wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force in
your country on the use of snow chains
and the maximum authorised speed.
Installation tips
F If you have to fit the chains during a journey,
stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side
of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
movement of your vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 31 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow to avoid
damaging your vehicle's tyres and the
road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with
alloy wheels, check that no part of the
chain or its fixings is in contact with the
wheel rim.
192
Practical information
Only use the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheels fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Chain type
205/60 R16
Maximum link size:
9 mm
205/55 R17
225/45 R18
THULE K-Summit
K34 model
exclusively
For more information on snow chains, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Towing device
Load distribution
F
Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. The maximum
towed load must be reduced by 10% for every
1,000 metres of altitude.
Use towing devices and their genuine
harnesses approved by CITROËN. It
is recommended that the installation
be performed by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
If the towing device is not fitted by
a CITROËN dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Important: for versions equipped with
the motorised tailgate with "Hands-Free
Tailgate Access" function, if a towing
device other than a genuine CITROËN
one is installed, it is imperative to
visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to recalibrate the detection
system: risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function failure.
Certain driving or manoeuvring aid
functions are automatically disabled if an
approved towing system is used.
Observe the maximum authorised towable
weight, indicated on your vehicle's
registration certificate, the manufacturer's
label as well as in the Technical data
section of this guide.
Complying with the maximum
authorised nose weight (towball)
also includes the use of accessories
(bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.).
Observe the legislation in force in the
country in which you are driving.
Vehicle equipped with motorised tailgate
with "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
function
To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate
when using the towing device:
- please deactivate this function in advance
in your vehicle's configuration menu,
- or remove the electronic key from the
recognition zone, with the tailgate closed.
7
193
Practical information
Towing system with
quickly detachable towball
No tools are required to install or remove the
towball on this genuine towbar system.
Trailers with LED lamps are not
compatible with the wiring harness of this
device.
Fitting
Blanking plug
In the event of recovery, it is essential to remove
the blanking plug if your vehicle has one.
To do this, contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
The blanking plug is located behind the
lower air intake grille.
F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove
the protective cover from the carrier.
F Press and hold control A on the towball.
F Unlock the locking mechanism by pressing
trigger B.
F Before fitting the towball, check that the
contact points, shown by arrows, are clean.
Use a clean and soft cloth.
F Fit the end of the towball into the carrier
underneath the rear bumper, as far as it can
go.
F Make sure that the towball is correctly
secured in place. The two pins must be in
contact with the carrier notches and trigger
B must be returned to the "locking" position.
F Install the protective cover and clip it into
place by turning it anti-clockwise.
F Connect the trailer plug to the 13 pin socket
next to the carrier.
F Secure the trailer by connecting its safety
cable to the hoop on the carrier.
194
Practical information
Removing
F Unclip and remove the protective cover, by
turning it clockwise.
F Press and hold control A on the towball.
F Unlock the locking mechanism by pressing
trigger B.
F Press trigger B and remove the towball by
pulling it towards you.
F Clip the protective cover to the carrier
underneath the bumper.
If the towball is not locked, the trailer can
detach. This may cause an accident.
Always lock the towball in accordance with
the descriptions.
Observe the legislation in force in the
country in which you are driving.
Remove the towball if it is not being used.
Before starting the vehicle, check that the
trailer lamps are working correctly.
Before setting off, check the adjustment of
the headlamp beam height.
Maximum weight authorised on the towing
device: 70 kg.
For more information on the Weights
of your vehicle, refer to the associated
section.
Carrier systems (box or bicycle carrier).
Always comply with the maximum load
authorised on the towing system: if it is
exceeded, this system may detach from
the vehicle and thus cause a serious
accident.
7
195
Practical information
Energy economy mode
System which manages the duration of use of
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can
still use functions such as the audio and
telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped
beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for
a maximum combined duration of about forty
minutes.
Switching to this mode
A message appears in the instrument panel
screen indicating that the vehicle has switched
to economy mode and the active functions are
put on standby.
If a telephone call is being made at this
time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system.
Exiting the mode
These functions will be automatically restored
the next time the vehicle is used.
In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes,
- for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for up to approximately thirty
minutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engine in order to charge the battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine from
starting.
For more information on the 12 V battery,
refer to the corresponding section.
Changing a wiper blade
Before removing a front
wiper blade
Removing
F Lift the corresponding wiper arm.
F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Refitting
F Position and clip the new wiper blade to the
arm.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
Load reduction mode
System which manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as air conditioning,
heated rear screen, etc.
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
F Within one minute after switching off the
ignition, operate the wiper control stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen.
or
F More than one minute after switching off the
ignition, straighten the arms manually.
196
Practical information
Roof bars
As a safety measure and to avoid
damaging the roof, it is essential to use
the transverse bars approved for your
vehicle.
Observe the fitting instructions and the
conditions of use in the user guide supplied
with the bars.
Version without longitudinal
bars
Version with longitudinal
bars
Recommendations
F Distribute the load evenly, avoiding
overloading on one side.
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load as
close as possible to the roof.
F Secure the load firmly and fit a warning flag
if it overhangs the vehicle.
F Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds (the
stability of the vehicle may be affected).
F Remove the roof bars once they are no
longer needed.
After refitting a front wiper
blade
F Switch on the ignition.
F Operate the wiper control stalk again to
park the wiper blades.
The replacement of wiper arms should be
carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing
points located on the roof frame. These points
are masked by the vehicle doors when closed.
The roof bar fixings include a stud which should
be fitted to the opening in each fixing point.
You must fit the transverse bars to the
longitudinal bars at the fixing points indicated
by engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.
7
197
Practical information
Maximum load, distributed over the roof
bars, for a loading height not exceeding
40 cm: 80 kg.
As this value may be changed, please
verify the maximum load quoted in the
user guide supplied with the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars and
the fixings on the vehicle.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects which are longer than
the vehicle.
When carrying long objects, it is
recommended that the motorised tailgate
function is deactivated.
Very cold climate screen(s)
(Depending on the country where the product
is sold.)
Removable screen(s) which prevent snow
accumulating at the radiator cooling fan.
Depending on the version, you have one or two
screens.
Before fitting or removing a screen,
ensure that the engine is off and the
cooling fan has stopped.
Fitting
Removing
F Use a screwdriver as a lever to release each
of the fixings of each screen in turn.
It is essential to remove the very cold
climate screen (or screens):
- when the exterior temperature exceeds
10°C,
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Vision 360 system
The pre-cut section must be removed
before fitting the screen on the front
bumper, in order to be able to release the
camera.
When the very cold climate screen is
present, the camera image is slightly
altered.
F Offer up the corresponding very cold
climate screen to the lower or upper section
of the front bumper.
F Press around its edge to engage the fixing
clips of each screen one by one.
198
Practical information
Bonnet
Opening
F Open the front left door.
F Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the
door aperture, towards you.
F Lift the lever and raise the bonnet.
F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support slot.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it near the
end of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully
latched.
The location of the interior bonnet release
lever prevents opening of the bonnet when
the left-hand front door is shut.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the stay with
care (risk of burns), using the protected
area.
When the bonnet is open, take care not to
damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy
conditions.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
deactivate the Stop & Start system to
avoid any risk of injury resulting from an
automatic change to START mode.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
7
199
Practical information
Engine compartment
This engine is shown as an example.
The positions of the following elements may
change:
- Air filter.
- Engine oil dipstick.
- Engine oil filler cap.
- Priming pump.
Petrol
Diesel
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
9. Remote earth point.
10. Priming pump*
The Diesel fuel system operates under
very high pressure.
All work on this circuit must be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with
the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them
up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The liquid must comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations and with
the vehicle's engine.
Take care when working under the bonnet,
as certain areas of the engine may be
extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
cooling fan could start at any time (even
with the ignition off).
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health
or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop and dispose of
it in the containers reserved for this
purpose.
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched in using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles equipped with an
electric gauge, or using the dipstick.
* Depending on engine.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
2. Engine coolant reservoir.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery/Fuses.
200
Practical information
If you find that the level is above the A mark or
below the B mark, do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk of
damage to the engine), contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you must
top up the engine oil.
Oil grade
Before topping up the oil or changing the oil,
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Topping up the engine oil level
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to access the filler
opening.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil
filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
After topping up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil level
indicator in the instrument panel is not
valid during the 30 minutes after topping
up.
Engine oil change
To ensure that the reading is correct, your
vehicle must be parked on a level surface
with the engine stopped for more than
30 minutes.
It is normal to top up the oil level between
two services (or oil changes). CITROËN
recommends that you check the level, and top
up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).
Checking using the dipstick
The location of the dipstick is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
pull it out completely.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between marks A and B.
A = MAX
B = MIN
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emissions control system, never use
additives in the engine oil.
7
201
Practical information
Brake fluid level
The fluid level should be close to the
"MAX" mark. If it is not, check the
brake pad wear.
Fluid specication
The fluid must conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Coolant level
Check the coolant level regularly.
It is normal to top up the fluid
between two services.
The check and top-up must only be done with
the engine cold.
A low coolant level presents a risk of serious
damage to your engine.
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX"
mark but should never exceed it.
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark,
it is essential to top up.
To avoid the risk of scalding when you need to
top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around
the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to
allow the pressure to drop.
Once the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up to the required level.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
Fluid specication
This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Screenwash/headlamp
wash level low
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, when the fluid
reservoir low level is reached this
warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message.
The warning lamp comes on when the ignition
is switched on, or every time the stalk is
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
The next time you stop, have the screenwash/
headlamp wash reservoir topped up.
Diesel fuel additive level
(Diesel with particle filter)
The additive reservoir low level is
indicated by fixed illumination of this
warning lamp, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message that
the particle filter additive level is
too low.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up without delay
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Level of AdBlue
An alert is triggered once the reserve level is
reached.
To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per
regulations, you must top up with AdBlue.
For more information on AdBlue and the SCR
system, and, in particular, topping up the tank,
refer to the corresponding section.
When the engine is hot, the temperature of the
coolant is regulated by the fan.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
202
Practical information
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these
components in accordance with the
manufacturer's service schedule and according
to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
However, check regularly that the
terminals are correctly tightened
(versions without quick release terminals)
and that the connections are clean.
For more information and the precautions
to take before starting work on the 12 V
battery, refer to the corresponding
section.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specific technology and specification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Air filter
Depending on the environment
(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the
use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving),
replace it twice as often if
necessary.
Passenger compartment
filter
Depending on the environment
(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the
use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving),
replace it twice as often if
necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment
filter may have an adverse effect on
the performance of the air conditioning
system and generate undesirable odours.
Oil filter
Change the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Particle filter (Diesel)
The start of saturation of the particle
filter is signalled by the temporary
illumination of this warning lamp
accompanied by a message warning
of the risk of the filter clogging up.
Traffic conditions permitting, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least
37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates
a low Diesel additive level.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
On a new vehicle, the first particle
filter regeneration operations may be
accompanied by a "burning" smell, which
is perfectly normal.
Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at the
exhaust on acceleration. This does not
affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the
environment.
7
203
Practical information
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes
checked, even between vehicle
services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any
specific check. However, in the
event of a problem, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
For more information on the Electric
parking brake, refer to the corresponding
section.
Wheels and tyres
The pressure must be checked on
all tyres, including the spare wheel,
when the tyres are "cold", at least
once a month and before a long
journey.
The pressures given on the tyre pressure label
are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven for
more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
(10 kilometres) at more than 31 mph (50 km/h),
0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be added to the values
given on the label.
Under-inflation increases fuel consumption.
Non-compliant tyre pressure causes premature
wear on tyres and has an adverse effect on the
vehicle's road holding – Risk of an accident!
Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces
braking efficiency and control of the vehicle's
steering. Regular inspections of the condition
of tyres (tread and sides) and rims are
recommended as well as making sure that
valves are fitted.
Using different size wheels and tyres from
those specified can affect the lifetime of tyres,
wheel rotation, ground clearance and the
speedometer reading and have an adverse
effect on road holding.
Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles
can cause the ESC to mistime.
204
Practical information
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent quality
and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
components as important as those in the
braking system, CITROËN selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness, or
in wintry conditions, ice can form on the
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency
may be reduced. Make light brake
applications to dry and defrost the brakes.
AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi engines)
To respect the environment and ensure
compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without
adversely affecting the performance or fuel
consumption of Diesel engines, CITROËN
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles
with a system that associates SCR (Selective
Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter
(DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases.
SCR system
Using a fluid called AdBlue
®
that contains
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85%
of nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
water, which are harmless to health and the
environment.
The AdBlue
®
is contained in
a special tank holding about
17 litres.
Its capacity allows a driving range of around
12,500 miles (20,000 km). An alert system is
triggered automatically once the reserve level
is reached: you can then drive for a further
1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is
empty.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is empty, a system
required by regulations prevents starting
of the engine.
If the SCR system is defective, the level of
emissions from your vehicle will no longer
meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle
becomes polluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault with the
SCR system, you must go to a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon
as possible: after a running distance of
685 miles (1,100 km), a system will be
triggered automatically to prevent engine
starting.
In either case, a range indicator gives you
the distance you can travel before the
vehicle is immobilised.
For more information on the Warning and
indicator lamps and associated alerts,
refer to the corresponding section.
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
AdBlue
®
freezes at temperatures below
around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater for the
AdBlue
®
tank, allowing you to continue
driving in very cold conditions.
7
205
Practical information
Topping up the AdBlue
®
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it
may be necessary to top up the fluid between
services, more particularly if an alert (warning
lamps and a message) signals the requirement.
You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If you envisage topping up yourself, please
read the following warnings carefully.
Supply of AdBlue
®
It is recommended that the AdBlue
®
is
topped up as soon as the first alert is
issued indicating that the reserve level has
been reached.
In order to ensure that the SCR system
operates correctly:
- Use only AdBlue
®
liquid that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
- Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container: it would lose its purity.
- Never dilute AdBlue
®
with water.
You can obtain AdBlue
®
from a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You can also visit a petrol station
equipped with AdBlue
®
pumps specially
designed for passenger vehicles (for those
versions with access to the AdBlue
®
tank
via the fuel filler flap).
Never top up from an AdBlue
®
dispenser
reserved for heavy goods vehicles.
Recommendations on
storage
AdBlue
®
freezes at about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. It should be stored in
a cool place and protected from direct sunlight.
Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
for at least a year.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
has completely thawed out.
Never keep containers or bottles of
AdBlue
®
in your vehicle.
Precautions for use
AdBlue
®
is a urea-based solution. This liquid
is non-flammable, colourless and odourless
(when kept in a cool place).
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
affected area with soap and water. In the event
of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the
eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye
wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel
a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get
medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (at high temperature,
for example), the risk of release of ammonia
cannot be excluded: do not inhale the vapour.
Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous
membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of children,
in its original container or bottle.
Procedure
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure
that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level
surface.
206
Practical information
In winter, check that the temperature of the
vehicle is above -11°C. If not, due to freezing,
the AdBlue
®
cannot be poured into the tank.
Park your vehicle somewhere warmer for a few
hours before topping up.
In the event of an AdBlue
®
breakdown,
confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue:
Starting impossible", you must top up with
at least 5 litres.
Never pour AdBlue
®
into the Diesel fuel
tank.
If any AdBlue
®
is splashed, or if there are
any spillages on the side of the body, rinse
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
using a sponge and hot water.
Important: in the event of a top-up after
a breakdown because of a lack of
AdBlue, you must wait around 5 minutes
before switching on the ignition, without
opening the driver's door, locking the
vehicle, introducing the key into the
ignition switch, or introducing the key of
the Keyless Entry and Starting system
into the passenger compartment.
Switch on the ignition, then wait for
10 seconds before starting the engine.
Access to the AdBlue
®
tank via
the boot
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it
may be necessary to top up the fluid between
services, as soon as an alert (warning lamps
and a message) indicates it.
You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If you intend to do the topping-up yourself,
read the following procedure carefully.
The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies
topping up.
F Press the "START/STOP" button to switch
off the engine.
F To gain access to the AdBlue
®
tank, raise
the floor of the boot or, for the 7-seater
version, fold down the seat of the 3
rd
row on
the right.
7
207
Practical information
Access to the AdBlue
®
tank via
the fuel ller ap
A blue cap under the fuel filler flap indicates
access to the AdBlue
®
tank.
Read the following procedure carefully to
be able to top up properly.
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue
®
. After first
checking the use-by date, carefully read
the instructions for use on the label before
pouring the contents of the container into
your vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
Or
F Insert the AdBlue
®
pump nozzle and fill the
tank until the nozzle stops automatically.
Important:
To prevent the AdBlue
®
tank from
overflowing, it is recommended:
F To top up between 10 and 13 litres
using containers of AdBlue
®
.
Or
F If filling in a service station, stop after
the third automatic shut-off of the
nozzle.
F After refilling, carry out these same
operations in reverse order.
F Without pressing, turn the black cap
a quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off.
F Turn the blue cap anti-clockwise and lift it
off.
F Obtain a non-drip bottle of AdBlue
®
. After
first checking the use-by date, carefully
read the instructions for use on the label
before pouring the contents of the bottle into
your vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
F After filling, perform the same operations in
reverse order.
F Press the "START/STOP" button to switch
off the engine.
F With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler
flap open, turn the AdBlue
®
blue filler cap
anti-clockwise.
208
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle
This safety device is used in addition to the
hazard warning lamps.
Its presence in the vehicle may be mandatory.
Before leaving your vehicle to set up and
install the triangle, switch on the hazard
warning lamps and put on your high
visibility vest.
Refer to the instructions on assembly/
unfolding indicated in the user guide
supplied with the triangle.
Placing the triangle on the
road
F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as
required by the legislation in force in your
country.
A space is provided for the storage of the
triangle in the interior trim of the tailgate.
Temporary puncture
repair kit
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.
Comprising a compressor and a sealant
cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest
garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of the compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair.
Access to the kit
The kit is stowed in a bag inside the storage
box located at the foot of the second row
passenger seat.
8
209
In the event of a breakdown
F Park the vehicle without obstructing any
traffic and apply the parking brake.
F Follow the safety instructions (hazard
warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing
high visibility vest, etc.) according to the
legislation in force in the country where you
are driving.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies which
have penetrated into the tyre.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
repaired, and place it in a clean area.
F Check that the compressor switch is at the
"O" position.
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under
the compressor.
Only the 12 V socket located at the front of
the vehicle can be used.
F Affix the speed limit sticker.
1. 12 V compressor, with built-in pressure
gauge.
2. Bottle of sealant, with built-in hose.
3. Speed limit sticker.
Repair procedure
Composition of the kit
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to
the bottle of sealant.
F Turn the sealant bottle over and secure it in
the notch provided on the compressor.
F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and
tighten firmly.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
210
In the event of a breakdown
The speed limit sticker must be secured
to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's
field of vision, to remind you that a wheel
is in temporary use.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
F Switch on the ignition.
F Start the compressor by turning the switch
to the "l" position until the pressure of the
tyre reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant product
is injected under pressure into the tyre;
do not disconnect the pipe from the valve
during this operation (risk of blowback).
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after
about 7 minutes, this indicates that the
tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop for
assistance.
F Place the switch in the "O" position.
F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug
from the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Replace the cap on the valve.
F Remove the kit.
F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant.
Take care, the sealant product is harmful
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on
the bottle.
After use, do not discard the bottle in
standard waste, take it to a CITROËN
dealer or an authorised waste disposal
site.
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of
sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
F Drive immediately for approximately three
miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed
(between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)),
to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and measure the
tyre pressure using the kit.
Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired
using this type of kit.
Checking/adjusting tyre
pressures
You can also use the compressor,
without injecting sealant, to check and, if
necessary, adjust the tyre pressures.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and
place it in a clean area.
8
211
In the event of a breakdown
F Check that the compressor switch is at the
"O" position.
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under
the compressor.
Only the 12 V socket located at the front
of the vehicle can be used to power the
compressor.
F Start the compressor by placing the switch
at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the
value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure
label. To deflate: press the black button
located on the compressor pipe, near the
valve connection.
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after
7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is
not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop for assistance.
F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
the switch to the "O" position.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km)
with the repaired tyre; see a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to change
the tyre.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres
be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise
the under-inflation detection system.
For more information on Tyre under-
inflation detection, refer to the
corresponding section.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor.
F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
firmly.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
Spare wheel
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.
Access to tooling
Procedure for changing a wheel with
a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare
wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
The tools are installed in the boot under the
floor.
Remove the boot carpet to access them.
212
In the event of a breakdown
List of tools
(Depending on equipment.)
4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool.
Removes the wheel bolt covers on alloy
wheels.
5. Socket for the security bolts (located in
the glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
6. Towing eye and tool to open the front
protective cover.
1. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and the wheel
fastening bolts.
2. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (except
versions with manual gearbox).
3. Jack with integrated handle.
Used to raise the vehicle.
For more information on Towing, refer to the
corresponding section.
All of these tools are specific to your
vehicle and may vary according to the
level of equipment.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
The jack must only be used to change
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one
supplied with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain the correct jack for it.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
The jack does not require any
maintenance.
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is located in the boot, under
the floor.
Taking out the wheel
F Loosen the central nut.
F Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt).
F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the
rear.
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
8
213
In the event of a breakdown
Putting the spare wheel back in
place
Since the width of the spare wheel is
smaller than the width of the wheels of
the vehicle, in the event of a puncture, the
punctured wheel must be stored in the boot.
F Put the wheel back in its housing.
F Loosen the nut on the bolt by a few turns.
F Position the fastening device (nut and bolt)
in the middle of the wheel.
F Tighten fully until the central nut clicks to
retain the wheel correctly.
F Put the box back in place in the centre of
the wheel.
Spare wheel
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.
Access to tooling
(Depending on version. The full set of tools is
supplied with the spare wheel.)
The rest of the tools, the jack 3 and the wheel
bolt cover removal tool 4, are stored in a box
attached to the spare wheel.
The assembly is secured under the vehicle by
means of a winch carrier system.
Procedure for changing a wheel with
a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare
wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
One part of the tools can be accessed from the
boot.
The immobilisation chock 2 as well as the
wheelbrace extension 6 are stored in the right-
hand section of the boot sill trim.
The wheelbrace 1 and the towing eye 7 are
stored in the left-hand section of the boot sill
trim.
214
In the event of a breakdown
List of tools
(Depending on version. The full set of tools is
supplied with the spare wheel.)
1. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel bolts.
2. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (except
for versions with manual gearbox).
3. Jack with integrated handle.
Used to raise the vehicle.
4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool.
Removes the wheel bolt covers on alloy
wheels.
5. Socket for wheel security bolts (stored in
the glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
6. Wheelbrace extension.
For slackening/tightening the spare wheel
winch cable carrier nut.
7. Towing eye and tool to open the front
protective cover.
For more information on Towing, refer to the
corresponding section.
All of these tools are specific to your
vehicle and may vary according to the
level of equipment.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
The jack must only be used to change
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one
supplied with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain the correct jack for it.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
The jack does not require any
maintenance.
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first remove the
trim using the wheelbrace 1 by pulling at the
valve aperture.
When refitting the wheel, refit the trim
starting by placing its notch facing the valve
and press around its edge with the palm of your
hand.
Access to the spare wheel
(Depending on version.)
Only a "space-saver" type spare wheel
may be fixed underneath the vehicle.
The spare wheel is supported by a winch
carrier system underneath the vehicle.
8
215
In the event of a breakdown
Taking out the spare wheel
F Fold back the concertina board and install
the third row seat, on the left-hand side (if
your vehicle is equipped with it).
F Lift the pre-cut section of carpet to remove
the fixing winch nut from the spare wheel.
F Detach the assembly of wheel and box from
the rear of the vehicle.
Tool storage
F Put the tools back in the box and store the
box in the boot of the vehicle.
F Reel in the winch by turning the key in
the clockwise direction: once the cable is
completely reeled in, you should no longer
feel any resistance.
F Store the rest of the tools in the storage
areas in the boot.
The wheel with the punctured tyre cannot
be fitted under the vehicle. It must be
stored in the boot. Use a cover to protect
the interior of the boot.
F With the extension 6 placed on the end of
wheelbrace 1, "tighten" the nut to unwind
the winch cable until the spare wheel is
flat on the ground. Unwind as much as
necessary in order to access the wheel
easily.
F Straighten the spare wheel to access tool
box (A).
F Detach the connecting piece from the cover
of the tool box (B – C).
F Pass the connecting piece through the
wheel hub to release it (D).
F Press the tab, slide the lid on the box up
to the middle and remove it to access the
other tools (jack and alloy wheel bolt cover
removal tool).
216
In the event of a breakdown
Putting the winch carrier and
spare wheel back in place
When the spare wheel is fitted in place of
a wheel with a punctured tyre, the winch
and tool box must be refitted underneath
the vehicle again before restarting.
F Straighten the wheel.
F Place the appropriate tools in the box and
close the cover again.
F Place the tool box on the ground.
F Pass the connecting piece through the
wheel hub (A).
F Insert the connecting piece into the tool box
hole (B – C).
F Centre and position the spare wheel on the
tool box (D).
F Insert the centring guide into the wheel hub.
F Place the wheel/box assembly beneath the
rear of the vehicle.
F Replace the wheel/box assembly beneath
the vehicle by "loosening" the winch control
nut with the wheelbrace and extension.
F Tighten fully. When the cable is completely
reeled in, turning the nut no longer
encounters resistance.
F Check that the wheel is properly flattened
against the floor.
8
217
In the event of a breakdown
Removing a wheel
* position P for the automatic gearbox
Parking the vehicle
Stop the vehicle where it does not block
traffic: the ground must be level, stable
and non-slippery.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
programmed in automatic mode; switch
off the ignition and put the vehicle into first
gear* so as to block the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamp and
the P warning lamp in the parking brake
control lever come on.
For more safety, position the chock
2 against the wheel opposite the one you
are replacing.
Make absolutely certain that all the
occupants have left the vehicle and are
waiting in a safe area.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
Do not use:
- the jack for any other purpose than
lifting the vehicle,
- a jack other than the one supplied by
the manufacturer.
List of operations
F Place the foot of the jack 3 on the ground
and ensure that it is directly below the front
A or rear B jacking point provided on the
underbody, whichever is closest to the
wheel to be changed.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
slip or collapse – Risk of injury!
Ensure that the jack is positioned only at
one of the jacking points A or B under the
vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's
contact surface is centred on the head of
the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged and/or the jack could collapse –
Risk of injury!
F Remove the bolt cover(s) using the tool 4
(according to equipment).
F Fit security socket 5 on wheelbrace 1 to
slacken the security bolt (according to
equipment).
F Slacken the other bolts (no more than
a 1/4 turn) using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Extend the jack 3 until its head comes into
contact with jacking point A or B used,
with contact surface A or B on the vehicle
correctly engaged with the central part of
the head of the jack.
218
In the event of a breakdown
Fitting a wheel
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
F Remove the bolts and keep them in a clean
place.
F Remove the wheel.
The jack must only be used to change
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
The jack does not require any
maintenance.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
List of operations
F Put the wheel in place on the hub.
F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using
wheelbrace 1 fitted with security socket 5
(according to equipment).
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
F Lower the vehicle again fully.
F Fold jack 3 and detach it.
8
219
In the event of a breakdown
Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is
normal to notice that the washers do not
come into contact with the "space-saver"
spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the
conical contact of each bolt.
After changing a wheel
With a "space-saver" type spare wheel
Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have the
tightness of the bolts and the pressure of
the spare wheel checked.
Have the punctured tyre examined. After
inspection, the technician will advise you
on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it
must be replaced.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
F Tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket
5 (according to equipment).
F Tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace
1 only.
F Refit the wheel bolt cover(s) (according to
equipment).
F Store the tools in the box.
The following is recommended:
- deactivate some driving aid functions
(Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise
control with Stop function, etc.), as
indicated on the label attached to the
wheel,
- do not exceed the maximum
authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
220
In the event of a breakdown
Changing a bulb
The lamps have polycarbonate lenses with
a protective coating:
F do not clean them using a dry or
abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent
or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep the
lance directed towards the lamps or
their edges for too long, so as not to
damage their protective coating and
seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done after
the lamp has been switched off for several
minutes (risk of serious burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with your
fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
(UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a new
bulb with the same type and specification.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D5S-25W) must be replaced
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Light-emitting diodes (LED)
For the replacement of this type of bulb,
you must contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Front lamps
Model with xenon headlamps
1. Dipped beam headlamps (D5S-25W).
2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
(6 light-emitting diodes – LEDs).
4. Direction indicators
(6 light-emitting diodes – LEDs).
5. Foglamps (H11-55W).
8
221
In the event of a breakdown
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
(4 light-emitting diodes – LEDs).
4. Direction indicators (PWY24W).
(light emitting diodes – LEDs).
5. Foglamps (H11-55W).
For bulbs with lugs (type H7, etc.), take
care to observe their correct installation so
as to ensure the best lighting performance.
Directional dipped beam
headlamps (xenon model)
Replacement of D5S xenon bulbs
must be done by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop as there is a risk of
electrocution.
In case of a fault in one of the two D5S
bulbs, it is recommended to also replace
the bulb on the opposite side.
Main beam headlamps (xenon
model)
Dipped beam headlamps
(halogen model)
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
F Push the connector.
F Pull the bulb to change it.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
F Turn the protective plastic cover to remove
it.
F Disconnect the connector.
F Unhook the clips.
F Pull the bulb to change it.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
222
In the event of a breakdown
Main beam headlamps (halogen model)
Direction indicators
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
F Push the connector.
F Pull the bulb to change it.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
Quicker flashing of the direction indicator
light (left or right) indicates that one of
the bulbs on the corresponding side has
failed.
The direction indicator bulb is located below
the headlamp.
F Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
a quarter of a turn.
F Remove the bulb holder.
F Change the faulty bulb.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
Direction indicators (light-
emitting diodes – LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Front foglamps
F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top.
F Remove the two screws to remove the unit.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn.
F Remove the bulb holder.
F Change the faulty bulb.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order,
pressing on the finisher to refit it.
Door mirror spotlamps
You should contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop for the replacement of the
light-emitting diode – LED.
Integrated direction indicator
side repeaters
You should contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop for the replacement of
these bulbs.
8
223
In the event of a breakdown
Rear lamps
1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
2. Sidelamps/foglamps (P21/5W).
Model with LED lamps
3. Brake lamps/sidelamps (light-emitting
diodes – LEDs).
4. Reversing lamps (W16W).
5. Direction indicators (PY21W).
Model with bulb lamps
3. Sidelamps (5W5).
4. Brake lamps (P21/W).
5. Direction indicators (WY16W).
6. Reversing lamp (W16W).
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs
For replacement, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Tailgate lamps
F Identify the faulty bulb.
F Open the boot.
F Remove the access cover.
F Remove the three lamp fixing screws A.
F Disconnect the connector.
F Carefully remove the lamp from the outside
by pushing the retaining clip B.
224
In the event of a breakdown
For the replacement of the bulbs of the
reversing lamp and of the direction indicators:
F Use the "universal" type tweezers to turn
the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-clockwise
and remove it.
F Change the bulb.
For the replacement of the bulbs of the
sidelamps and of the brake lamps:
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise and remove it.
F Change the bulb.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
Rear lamps
1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
2. Sidelamps/foglamps (P21/5W).
Model with LED lamps
3. Sidelamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs).
4. Brake lamps (light emitting diodes –
LEDs).
5. Direction indicators (PY21W).
6. Reversing lamps (light emitting diodes –
LEDs).
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs
For replacement, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Model with LED lamps
Model with bulb lamps
8
225
In the event of a breakdown
3. Sidelamps (W5W).
4. Brake lamps/sidelamps (P21W).
5. Direction indicators (WY16W).
6. Reversing lamp. (W16W).
Tailgate lamp
Model with LED lamps
Direction indicators, sidelamps
and foglamps
Model with bulb lamps
Identify the faulty bulb.
F Open the boot.
F Remove the access cover.
F Remove the three lamp fixing screws A.
F Disconnect the connector.
F Carefully remove the lamp from its location.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise and remove it.
F Change the bulb.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
Model with bulb lamps
For access, pass your hand under the bumper.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
remove it.
F Change the bulb.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
226
In the event of a breakdown
Third brake lamp (light-emitting
diodes – LEDs)
Number plate lamps (W5W)
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut-
outs in the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it.
F Remove the lens.
F Change the faulty bulb.
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
You can also contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop for the replacement of
these bulbs.
For the replacement of this type of lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing a fuse
Access to tooling
The extraction tweezers are fitted in the
dashboard fuses compartment.
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top right,
then left,
F Completely remove the cover by carefully
pulling it in the axis indicated by the arrow,
F Remove the tweezers.
F Open the glove box
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left,
then right.
F Completely remove the cover by carefully
pulling it in the axis indicated by the arrow.
F Remove the tweezers.
Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse, it is necessary to:
F identify the cause of the failure and correct
it,
F switch off all electrical loads,
F immobilise the vehicle and switch off the
ignition,
F identify the defective fuse using the existing
allocation tables and diagrams.
8
227
In the event of a breakdown
To remove or fit a fuse, it is essential to:
F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of
its filament,
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
of the same rating (same colour); using
a different rating could cause faults (risk of
fire).
If the fuse fails again soon after replacement,
have the vehicle's electrical system checked by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Replacing a fuse not shown in the tables
may cause a serious malfunction of your
vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Installing electrical accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your vehicle,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
CITROËN will not accept responsibility for
the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting
from the installation of accessories
not supplied and not recommended by
CITROËN and not installed in accordance
with its instructions, in particular when
the combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected exceeds
10 milliamperes.
Fuses in the dashboard
The two fuseboxes are located in the lower
dashboard (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
Good Failed
Tweezers
228
In the event of a breakdown
Fuse tables
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 40 A Heated rear screen.
F2 20 A Electric door mirrors.
F5 30 A Panoramic glass sunroof blind.
F6 20 A 12 V, rear multimedia sockets.
F7 20 A 230 V socket.
F9 25 A Heated seats.
F10 20 A Trailer interface unit.
F11 20 A Air conditioning blower.
F12 30 A Electric window motor.
Fusebox 1
8
229
In the event of a breakdown
Fusebox 2
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F7 10 A 12 V boot socket, rear multimedia.
F8 20 A Rear windscreen wiper.
F10 30 A Locks.
F17 5 A Instrument panel.
F18 5 A Automatic gearbox selector.
F21 3 A START/STOP button.
F22 3 A Rain and sunshine sensor, windscreen camera.
F24 5 A Parking aid, panoramic visual aid.
F27 5 A Automatic gearbox.
F29 20 A Audio and telematics systems.
F32 15 A 12 V sockets.
F35 5 A Headlamp beam height adjustment, heated rear screen, radar.
F36 5 A Lighting: glove box, central storage, reading lamps, courtesy
lamps.
230
In the event of a breakdown
Table of fuses
Fuse no. Rating Functions
F16 20 A Headlamp wash.
F18 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F19 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F29 40 A Wipers.
Fuses in the engine
compartment
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery.
Access to the fuses
F Unclip the cover by pushing the 2 red
latches towards the back of the vehicle.
F Change the fuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
very carefully to ensure correct sealing of
the fusebox.
8
231
In the event of a breakdown
12 V battery
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead.
They must be disposed of in
accordance with regulations and must
not, in any circumstances, be discarded
with household waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection
point.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources of
sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion
or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Access to the battery
The battery (-) terminal is not accessible.
A remote earth point is located on the upper
part of the bonnet (next to the battery).
Starting using another
battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a backup battery
(external or from another vehicle) and jump
leads or a battery booster.
Never try to start the engine by connecting
a battery charger.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
booster.
Check beforehand that the backup
battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and
a capacity at least equal to that of the
discharged battery.
The two vehicles must not be in contact
with each other.
Switch off the electrical consumers on
both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
lighting, etc.).
Ensure that the jump lead cables do not
pass close to moving parts of the engine
(cooling fan, belts, etc.).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while
the engine is running.
The battery is located under the bonnet.
For access to the (+) terminal:
F release the bonnet using the interior lever,
then the exterior safety catch,
F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay,
F lift the plastic cover for access to the (+)
terminal.
232
In the event of a breakdown
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a few
minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few moments
before trying again.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
stationary, so that the battery reaches an
adequate state of charge.
Some functions, including Stop & Start,
are not available if the battery is not
sufficiently charged.
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
essential to maintain an adequate state of
charge.
If you wish to charge your vehicle's battery
yourself, use only a charger compatible
with lead-acid batteries with a nominal
voltage of 12 V.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of
flat battery A (at the metal elbow) then to
the (+) terminal of backup battery B or the
booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of backup battery
B or the booster (or an earth point on the
other vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to earth point C on the broken down
vehicle.
In some circumstances it may be necessary to
charge the battery:
- if you only use your vehicle for short
journeys,
- if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
8
233
In the event of a breakdown
Disconnecting the battery
In order to maintain an adequate state
of charge for starting the engine, it is
recommended that the battery be disconnected
if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
period.
Quick-release terminal clamp
F Switch off the ignition.
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
F Switch off charger B before connecting the
cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
F Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has
one, on the (+) terminal.
F Connect charger B cables as follows:
- the (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of
battery A,
- the (-) black cable to earth point C on the
vehicle.
Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk
of explosion!
If the battery has frozen, have it checked
by a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified
workshop who will check that the internal
components have not been damaged and
that the container has not cracked, which
would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive
acid leaking.
F At the end of the charging operation, switch
off charger B before disconnecting the
cables from battery A.
If this label is present, it is essential to
use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing
irreversible damage to the electrical
components related to the Stop & Start
system.
Before disconnecting the battery:
F close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
roof),
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, etc.).
F switch off the ignition and wait for four
minutes.
At the battery, detach the (+) terminal only.
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B.
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off.
234
In the event of a breakdown
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
Do not force the lever as locking will not
be possible if the clamp is not positioned
correctly; start the procedure again.
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
permit initialisation of the electronic systems. If
minor problems nevertheless persist following
this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specific technology and specification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following the
first engine start.
In this case, the system will only be
available again after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
a period which depends on the exterior
temperature and the state of charge of the
battery (up to about 8 hours).
F Raise the lever A fully.
F Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
F Push the clamp B fully down.
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must yourself reinitialise (depending on
version):
- the remote control key,
- the electric blind(s),
- etc.
Towing
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for
towing another vehicle using the towing eye.
Access to tooling
The towing eye is installed in the boot under
the floor.
The tool for opening the front protective cover
is fixed to the towing eye.
To access it:
F open the boot,
F lift the floor and remove it,
F remove the towing eye from the holder.
8
235
In the event of a breakdown
Failure to follow this instruction may cause
damage to some components (braking,
driveline, etc.) and the absence of braking
assistance when the engine is restarted.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
Towing another vehicle
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your
country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is greater than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, always use an approved
towbar: rope and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
off, there is no longer braking and steering
assistance.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
fast road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towbar,
etc. available.
Towing your vehicle
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
using the tool fixed on the ring.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towbar.
F Move the gear lever into neutral (position N
for an automatic gearbox).
F Unlock the steering by turning the ignition
key one notch and release the parking
brake.
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towbar.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
236
In the event of a breakdown
Running out of fuel
(Diesel)
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel
system must be primed if you run out of fuel.
For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the
corresponding engine compartment view.
For more information on Diesel misfuel
prevention, refer to the corresponding
section.
If the engine does not start first time, do
not keep trying but start the procedure
again from the beginning.
BlueHDi 100 S&S, BlueHDi
115/120 S&S and BlueHDi
135/150 S&S engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
BlueHDi 130 S&S and
BlueHDi 160 S&S engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
ignition.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
If the engine does not start, repeat the
procedure.
Other engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the
priming pump.
F Operate the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt
(there may be resistance on the
first press).
F Put the cover back in place and clip it in.
F Close the bonnet.
F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the
engine does not start at the first attempt,
wait around 15 seconds before trying
again).
F If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
237
9
Technical data
Engine technical data and
towed loads
Engines
The engine characteristics are given in the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in
sales brochures.
The maximum power corresponds to the
value type-approved on a test bed, under
conditions defined in European legislation
(Directive 1999/99/EC).
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Weights and towed loads
The weights and towed loads relating to your
vehicle are given in the registration document,
as well as in sales brochures.
These values are also given on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value
must be reduced by 10% for each additional
1,000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised nose weight
corresponds to the weight permitted on the
towball.
When exterior temperatures are high,
the vehicle performance may be limited
in order to protect the engine. When the
exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
limit the towed weight.
Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can
adversely affect roadholding.
Braking distances are increased when
towing a trailer.
When using a vehicle to tow, never
exceed a speed of approximately 60 mph
(100 km/h) (observe the local legislation
in force).
If the exterior temperature is high, it is
recommended that the engine is allowed
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
238
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – PETROL
Petrol engines
PureTech
110 S&S**
PureTech
130 S&S**
PureTech
130 S&S***
PureTech
130 S&S**
PureTech
130 S&S***
Gearbox
BVM6 (manual
6-speed)
BVM6 (manual
6-speed)
BVM6 (manual
6-speed)
EAT6 (automatic
6-speed)
EAT8 (automatic
8-speed)
Code EB2DTS EB2DTS EB2ADTS EB2DTS EB2ADTS
Model codes
3D 3D…3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A …
HNX…
M/1S – M/2SM
HNY…
M/1S – M/2SM
HNS…P
HNY…
T/1S – T/2S
HNS…R
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96 96 96
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1,130
1,270-1,050-
1,050
-
1,270-1,050-
1,050
-
Unbraked trailer 640 640-647-648 - 640-647-648 -
Recommended nose weight 70 70 - 70 -
3D…: CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
3E…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(5 seats).
3A…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
** Euro 6.1 engine
*** Euro 6.2 engine
239
9
Technical data
Petrol engines THP 150/160** THP 165 S&S**
THP 165 S&S**
(For Israel)
PureTech 180 S&S***
Gearbox
EAT6 (automatic
6-speed)
EAT6 (automatic
6-speed)
EAT6 (automatic
6-speed)
EAT8 (automatic
8-speed)
Code EP6FDTM EP6FDT EP6FDTM EP6FADTXD
Model codes
3D…3E… 3A … 3D…3E… 3A … 3D…3E… 3A … 3E… 3A …
5GX – 5GY…
A-A/1-A/2-A/D- A/1D-
A/2D-Y-Y/1-Y/2
5GZT/S
5GY…
A/S – A/1S – A/2S
5GF…R
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,598 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110/121 121 121 132
Fuel Unleaded/Alcohol Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
800
1,400
-
1,250-1,200
1,400
-
1,250-1,200
-
Unbraked trailer 600
685
-
690-690
685
-
690-690
-
Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 -
3D…: CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
3E…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(5 seats).
3A…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
** Euro 6.1 engine
*** Euro 6.2 engine
240
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – DIESEL
Diesel engines HDi 115* HDi 115* BlueHDi 100 S&S**
Gearbox BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed)
Code DV6C DV6C DV6FD
Model codes
3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…
9HC8 9HC8/1
BHY…
6/1S – 6/2SM
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,560 1,560 1,560
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 85 85 73
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1,400-1,240-1,200 800 1,200-1,000-1,000
Unbraked trailer 680-690-690 685-695-695 645-659-660
Recommended nose weight 70 70 70
…/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop &
Start.
3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(5 seats).
3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
* Euro 5 engine
** Euro 6.1 engine
241
9
Technical data
Diesel engines BlueHDi 115/120 S&S** BlueHDi 130 S&S*** BlueHDi 130 S&S***
Gearbox EAT6 (automatic 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed)
Code DV6FCD DV5RC DV5RC
Model codes
3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…
BHZ – BHX…
T/1S – T/2S
YHZ…
P/S – P/1S – P/2S
YHZ…
P/S – P/1S – P/2S
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,560 1,499 1,499
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 85/88 96 96
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1,400-1,200-1,200 - -
Unbraked trailer 660-675-675 - -
Recommended nose weight 70 - -
…/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop &
Start.
3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(5 seats).
3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
** Euro 6.1 engine
*** Euro 6.2 engine
242
Technical data
Diesel engines BlueHDi 130 S&S***
BlueHDi
135/150 S&S**
BlueHDi
135/150 S&S**
BlueHDi 160 S&S***
Gearbox
EAT8 (automatic
8-speed)
BVM6 (manual
6-speed)
EAT6 (automatic
6-speed)
EAT8 (automatic
8-speed)
Code DV5RC DW10FD DW10FD DW10FCC
Model codes
3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…
YHZ…R
AHX-AHR-AHV-AHS…
M/S – M/1S
AHX…
T/S – T/1S
EHY…
R/S – R/1S
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,499 1,997 1,997 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 110 110 120
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
- 1,500-1,450-1,400 1,500-1,380-1,300 1,500-1,300-1,300
Unbraked trailer - 745-750-750 750 750
Recommended nose weight - 70 70 70
…/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop &
Start.
3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(5 seats).
3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
*** Euro 6.2 engine
** Euro 6.1 engine
243
9
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)
These dimensions have been measured on an
unladen vehicle.
* Mirrors folded in.
244
Technical data
Identication markings
Different visible markings for the identification
and research of your vehicle.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the chassis near
the right-hand front wheel arch.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on
the windscreen lower cross member.
The number is on a label, visible through the
windscreen.
-
the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval number,
- the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
- the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle
weight),
- the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross
train weight),
- the maximum weight on the front axle,
- the maximum weight on the rear axle.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label on the middle door pillar, driver's
side, contains the following information:
- the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load,
- the tyre sizes (including the load index and
speed rating),
- the spare tyre inflation pressure,
- the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped
with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting inflation pressure.
C. Manufacturer's label.
This tamperproof label on the middle door
pillar, right or left-hand side, contains the
following information:
- the name of the manufacturer,
Checking tyre pressures
The tyre pressures should be checked when
cold at least monthly.
The pressures given on the label are valid for
cold tyres. If you have driven for more than
10 minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres)
at more than 31 mph (50 km/h), the tyres will be
warm; in this case 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be
added to the pressures given on the label.
Never reduce the pressure of a warm tyre.
Low tyre pressures increase fuel
consumption.
1
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
CITROËN Connect Radio
Multimedia audio system –
Applications – Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 2
Steering mounted controls 3
Menus 4
Applications 5
Radio 6
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 8
Media 9
Telephone 11
Settings 16
Frequently asked questions 18
The different functions and settings
described vary depending on the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that
it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the Energy Economy
Mode message signals that a change to
standby is imminent.
The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Source Software) codes for the system.
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
2
CITROËN Connect Radio
First steps
With the engine running, a press
mutes the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns
the system on.
Adjustment of the volume.
Use the buttons on either side of or below the
touch screen for access to the menus, then
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or
"Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen
for access to the menus, then press the virtual
buttons in the touch screen.
You can display the menus at any time by
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press in the grey zone to go back a level or
confirm.
Press the back arrow to go back a level or
confirm.
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
no additional product.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
* Depending on equipment.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
the upper band of the touch screen:
- Reminder of the air conditioning information
(depending on version), and direct access to
the corresponding menu.
- Reminder of the Radio Media and
Telephone menu information.
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
and digital instrument panel.
Selecting the audio source (depending on version):
- FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations.
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth* and
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming).
- CD player (depending on model).
- USB memory stick.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary socket
(depending on model).
In the "Settings" menu you can create
a profile for just one person or a group
of people with common points, with the
possibility of entering a multitude of
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken
into account automatically.
3
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may go
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
Steering mounted controls
Steering mounted controls –
Type 1
Radio:
Select the previous/next preset radio
station.
Select the previous/next item in
a menu or a list.
Media:
Select the previous/next track.
Select the previous/next item in
a menu or a list.
Radio:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media:
Short press: display the list of
folders.
Long press: display the available
sorting options.
Change audio source (radio; USB;
AUX if equipment connected; CD;
streaming).
Confirm a selection.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute/Restore sound by
simultaneously pressing the
increase and decrease volume
buttons.
Steering mounted controls
– Type 2
Depending on model.
Voice commands:
This control is located on the
steering wheel or at the end of the
lighting control stalk (depending on
model).
Short press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
or
Increase volume.
or
Mute/Restore the sound.
Or
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one
of the two volume buttons.
4
21,518,5
CITROËN Connect Radio
or
Decrease volume.
or
Media (short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone (short press): start
telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
or
Radio (rotate): previous/next preset.
Media (rotate): previous/next track,
move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if
nothing selected, access to presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Menus
Depending on model/Depending on version
Air conditioning
Manage various temperature and air
flow settings.
Applications
Access configurable equipment.
Radio Media
Select an audio source or radio
station.
Telephone
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
.
Operate certain applications on
a smartphone connected via
MirrorLink
TM
, CarPlay
®
or Android
Auto.
5
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Settings
Configure a personal profile and/
or configure the sound (balance,
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
Driving
Activate, deactivate or configure
certain vehicle functions.
Navigation
Configure the guidance and select
your destination via MirrorLink
TM
,
CarPlay
®
or Android Auto.
Applications
Viewing photos
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The system can read folders and image files in
the formats:.tiff;.gif;.jpg/jpeg;.bmp;.png.
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Photos".
Select a folder.
Select an image to view.
Press this button to display the
details of the photo.
Press the back arrow to go back
a level.
6
CITROËN Connect Radio
Managing messages
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "SMS".
Select the "SMS" tab.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages.
Press this button to search for
a contact.
Select the "Quick messages" tab.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages.
Radio
Selecting a station
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press one of the buttons for an
automatic search for radio stations.
Or
Move the cursor for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Or
Press the frequency.
Enter the FM and AM waveband
values using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Radio reception may be affected by the
use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
The external environment (hills, buildings,
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This is a normal effect of the way in
which radio waves are transmitted and
does not indicate any failure of the audio
equipment.
Changing waveband
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Band" to change waveband.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency.
Make a short press on the star
outline. If the star is filled in, the
radio station is already preset.
Or
Select a radio station or frequency.
Press "Preset".
Make a long press on one of the
buttons to preset the station.
7
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Activating/Deactivating RDS
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/Deactivate "RDS".
Press in the grey area to confirm.
The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue
listening to the same station by automatically
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of this RDS
station may not be assured throughout the
entire country as radio stations do not cover
100% of the territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
Display text information
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/Deactivate "News"/"Info".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Play TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
gives priority to TA alert messages.
To operate, this function needs good
reception of a radio station that carries
this type of message. While traffic
information is being broadcast, the current
media is automatically interrupted so that
the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/Deactivate "TA".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Audio settings
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Audio settings".
Select the "Tone" or "Balance"
or "Ringtones" or "Sound" tab to
configure the audio settings.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
8
CITROËN Connect Radio
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio
settings, as well as Bass, Medium and
Treble are different and independent for
each audio source.
In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers,
Driver and Front only settings are
common to all sources.
In the "Sound" tab, activate or deactivate
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary
input" and "Touch tones".
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys
©
system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Onboard audio: the Arkamys
©
Sound
Staging optimises the balance/distribution
of sound in the passenger compartment.
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception.
The different "multiplex/ensemble"
services offer a choice of radio stations
arranged in alphabetical order.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Waveband" to select the
"DAB band".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
FM-DAB Tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
the "FM-DAB Tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding FM analogue station (if
there is one).
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/Deactivate "FM-DAB
Tracking".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
If "FM-DAB Tracking" is activated, there
is a difference of a few seconds when the
system switches to FM analogue radio
with sometimes a variation in volume.
When the digital signal quality becomes
good, the system automatically switches
back to "DAB".
9
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB
Tracking" is not activated, the sound will
cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
Media
USB port
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or
connect the USB device to the USB port using
a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB stick is
connected. The lists are memorised: if they are
not modified, the subsequent loading time will
be shorter.
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
(depending on model/depending on equipment)
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
has been checked in the audio settings.
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.)
to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not
supplied).
First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
Display and management of the controls are
via the portable device.
Selecting the source
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "SOURCES" button.
Choose the source.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your smartphone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first
adjust the volume on your portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of your system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
smartphone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in Streaming mode, the
smartphone is considered to be a media
source.
10
CITROËN Connect Radio
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those
of the portable device connected
(artists/albums/genres/playlists/
audiobooks/podcasts); you can also use
a classification structured in the form of
a library.
The default classification used is by artist.
To modify the classification used, return
to the first level of the menu then select
the desired classification (playlists for
example) and confirm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
Information and advice
The system supports USB Mass Storage
devices, BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via USB ports. The adapter cable
is not supplied.
Device management is done by the audio
system controls.
Other devices, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
depending on compatibility.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The audio equipment will only play audio files
with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using special characters
(e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
display problems.
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device be used.
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard be always used on an individual disc,
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.
11
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Telephone
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a personal
smartphone allows users to display
applications adapted for the smartphone's
MirrorLink
TM
technology on the vehicle
screen.
The processes and standards
are constantly changing. For the
communication process between the
smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone be
unlocked; update the operating system
of the smartphone as well as the date
and time of the smartphone and the
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
As a safety measure, applications can
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
moving.
The "MirrorLink
TM
" function requires
a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth
®
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "MirrorLink"
TM
function.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth
®
be started on the
smartphone.
Telephone connected by
Bluetooth
®
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press the "PHONE" button to display the
secondary page.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
Once the connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
to MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
your network.
12
CITROËN Connect Radio
CarPlay
®
smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a personal
smartphone allows users to display
applications compatible with the
smartphone's CarPlay
®
technology on the
vehicle screen when the smartphone's
CarPlay
®
function has been previously
activated.
As the processes and standards are
constantly changing, it is recommended
that you keep your smartphone's
operating system updated.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
From the system, press Telephone
to display the CarPlay
®
interface.
Or
If the smartphone is already
connected by Bluetooth
®
.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
On connecting the USB cable, the
CarPlay
®
function deactivates the
system's Bluetooth
®
mode.
You can go to the CarPlay
®
navigation at any time by pressing
the system's Navigation button.
Android Auto smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
On your smartphone, download the
Android Auto application.
The synchronisation of a personal
smartphone allows users to display
applications adapted for the smartphone's
Android Auto technology on the vehicle
screen.
The processes and standards
are constantly changing. For the
communication process between the
smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone be
unlocked; update the operating system
of the smartphone as well as the date
and time of the smartphone and the
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
13
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
As a safety measure, applications can
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
moving.
The "Android Auto" function requires the
use of a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth
®
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "Android Auto"
function.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth
®
is started on the
smartphone
Telephone connected by
Bluetooth
®
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press the "PHONE" button to display the
secondary page.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
Different audio sources remain accessible in
the margin of the Android Auto display, using
touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
your network.
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the
list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure is used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
14
CITROËN Connect Radio
Procedure from the system
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone, you
may be asked to accept or not the transfer
of your contacts and messages.
Automatic reconnection
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again, it is
automatically recognised and within about
30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
the connection is established without any
action on your part (Bluetooth activated).
To modify the connection profile:
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press the "details" button of a paired
device.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Internet data".
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check the instructions for your
telephone and with your service provider
for the services to which you have access.
The profiles compatible with the system
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
15
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it.
Deleting a telephone
Press the basket at the top right
of the screen to display a basket
alongside the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted PHONE button to accept
an incoming call.
And
Make a long press
on the steering mounted PHONE
button to reject the call.
Or
Press "End call".
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended
while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
controls.
Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted PHONE
button.
Press "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Press "Call".
Calling a recently used
number
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or
Make a long press
on the steering mounted button.
16
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press "Recent calls".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call directly
from the telephone; as a safety measure,
first park the vehicle.
Setting the ringtone
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Ring volume" to display the
volume bar.
Press the arrows or move the cursor
to set the ring volume.
Settings
Profile settings
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of the
driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the vehicle stationary.
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Profiles".
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"
or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press this button to activate the
profile.
Press the back arrow again to
confirm.
Press this button to initialise the
profile selected.
Adjust brightness
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press Brightness.
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of
the instrument panel (depending on
version).
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Modifying system settings
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
17
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "System configuration".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
fuel consumption and temperature.
Press "Factory settings" to return to the initial
settings.
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by default
(depending on version).
Select "System info" to display the versions of
the different modules installed in the system.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Screen configuration".
Press "Brightness".
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of
the instrument panel (depending on
version).
Press "Animation".
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling".
Select "Animated transitions".
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Select the language
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Language" to change the
language.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Setting the time
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Date and time".
Select "Time".
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save the time.
Press this button to define the time
zone.
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
18
CITROËN Connect Radio
Activate or deactivate
synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
Press the back arrow to save the
settings.
The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Setting the date
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Date and time".
Select "Date".
Press on this button to define the
date.
Press the back arrow to save the
date.
Select the display format of the date.
Press the back arrow again to
confirm.
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS Synchronisation" is
deactivated.
The change between winter and summer
time is done by changing the time zone.
Frequently asked questions
The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning your audio system.
19
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Radio
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The reception quality of the tuned radio station
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are not
working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of
the station or no transmitter is present in the
geographical area.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
upper band to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception,
including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
received stations.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or has changed its
name in the list.
Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
"Radio" page.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
20
CITROËN Connect Radio
Media
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick
may greatly slow down access to reading
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
Some information characters in the currently
playing media are not displayed correctly.
The audio system does not display some types
of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically
launch playback.
Start playback from the device.
Names of tracks and playing time are not
displayed on the audio streaming screen.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
transfer of this information.
21
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Telephone
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be
switched off or the telephone may not be
visible.
Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with
the system.
You can check the compatibility of your
telephone on the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in
Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
The sound depends on both the system and
the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the
telephone call.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
order.
Some telephones offer display options.
Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the telephone directory display settings.
22
CITROËN Connect Radio
Settings
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
When changing the setting of treble and bass,
the ambience setting is deselected.
When changing the ambience setting, the
treble and bass settings are reset.
The selection of an ambience setting imposes
the settings for treble and bass and vice versa.
Modify the treble and bass or ambience
settings to obtain the desired musical
ambience.
When changing the balance setting,
distribution is deselected.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes
the balance settings and vice versa.
Modify the balance setting or the distribution
setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
There is a difference in sound quality between
the different audio sources.
To allow for optimal listening quality, the
audio settings can be tailored to different
sound sources, which can generate audible
differences when changing source.
Check that the audio settings are adapted
to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio
functions to the middle position.
When the engine is off, the system switches off
after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
Start the engine to increase the charge of the
battery.
1
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
CITROËN Connect Nav
GPS satellite navigation –
Applications – Multimedia
audio system – Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 2
Steering mounted controls 3
Menus 3
Voice commands 5
Navigation 11
Connected navigation 13
Applications 16
Radio 21
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 22
Media 23
Telephone 25
Settings 29
Frequently asked questions 32
The different functions and settings
described vary depending on the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that
it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the Energy Economy
Mode message signals that a change to
standby is imminent.
The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Source Software) codes for the system.
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
2
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
CITROËN Connect Nav
First steps
With the engine running, a press
mutes the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns
the system on.
Adjustment of the volume.
Use the buttons either side of or below the
touch screen for access to the menus, then
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or
"Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen
for access to the menus, then press the virtual
buttons in the touch screen.
You can display the menus at any time by
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press the cross to go back a level.
Press "OK" to confirm.
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
no additional product.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
* Depending on equipment.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
the upper band of the touch screen:
- Reminder of the air conditioning information
(depending on version), and direct access to
the corresponding menu.
- Go directly to the selection of the audio
source, to the list of radio stations (or list of
titles depending on the source).
- Go to the message notifications, emails,
map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and
the digital instrument panel.
Selecting the audio source (depending on
version):
- FM/DAB*/AM* radios.
- USB memory stick.
- CD Player (depending on model).
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
socket (depending on model).
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming).
3
.
21,518,5
12:1323 °C
CITROËN Connect Nav
In the "Settings" menu you can create
a profile for just one person or a group
of people with common points, with the
possibility of entering a multitude of
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
navigation history, contact favourites,
etc.); these settings are taken into account
automatically.
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may go
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
Steering mounted controls
Depending on model
Voice commands:
This control is located on the
steering wheel or at the end of the
lighting control stalk (depending on
model).
Short press, system voice
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
or
Increase volume.
or
Mute/Restore the sound.
Or
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one
of the two volume buttons.
or
Decrease volume.
or
Media (short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone (short press): start
telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
or
Radio (rotate): automatic search for
the previous/next station.
Media (rotate): previous/next track,
move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if
nothing selected, access to presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Menus
Depending on model/Depending on version
Air conditioning
Manage various temperature and air
flow settings.
4
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
CITROËN Connect Nav
Connected navigation
or
Enter navigation settings and
choose a destination.
Use services available in real time,
depending on equipment.
Applications
or
Operate certain applications on
a smartphone connected via
CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android
Auto.
Check the state of the Bluetooth
®
and Wi-Fi connections.
Radio Media
Telephone
or
Connect a telephone via Bluetooth
®
,
read messages and emails and send
quick messages.
Settings
or
Configure a personal profile and/
or configure the sound (balance,
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
or
Select an audio source, a radio
station, display photographs.
5
.
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
CITROËN Connect Nav
Vehicle
or
Activate, deactivate or configure
certain vehicle functions.
Voice commands
Steering mounted controls
Pressing this button activates the
voice commands function.
To ensure that voice commands are
always recognised by the system, please
observe the following recommendations:
- speak in a normal tone without
breaking up words or raising your
voice.
- always wait for the "beep" (audible
signal) before speaking.
- for best operation, it is recommended
that the windows and sunroof
be closed to avoid extraneous
interference (depending on version).
- before making a voice command, ask
other passengers not to speak.
First steps
Example of a "voice command" for
navigation:
"Navigate to address, 11 Regent
Street, London".
Example of a "voice command" for
the radio and media:
"Play artist, Madonna".
Example of a "voice command" for
the telephone:
"Call David Miller".
The voice commands, with a choice of
12 languages (English, French, Italian,
Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese,
Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic,
Brazilian), are made using the language
previously chosen and set in the system.
For some voice commands, there are
alternative synonyms.
Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/…
The voice commands in Arabic for:
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI in
the city" are not available.
6
CITROËN Connect Nav
Information – Using the system
Press the Push To Talk voice
command button and tell me
what you'd like after the tone.
Remember you can interrupt
me at any time by pressing
this button. If you press it
again while I'm waiting for
you to speak, it'll end the
conversation. If you need to
start over, say "cancel". If you
want to undo something, say
"undo". And to get information
and tips at any time, just say
"help". If you ask me to do
something and there's some
information missing that I need,
I'll give you some examples
or take you through it step by
step. There's more information
available in "beginner" mode.
You can set the dialogue mode
to "expert" when you feel
comfortable.
Global voice commands
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice
command" or "Telephone" button located
on the steering wheel, as long as there is
no telephone call in progress.
Voice commands Help messages
Help There are lots of topics I can help you with.
You can say: "help with phone", "help with
navigation", "help with media" or "help with
radio". For an overview on how to use voice
controls, you can say "help with voice controls".
Voice command help
Navigation help
Radio help
Media help
Telephone help
Set dialogue mode as <…> Choose "beginner" or "expert" mode.
Select profile <…> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no"
and we'll start that again.
No
7
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
"Navigation" voice
commands
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice
command" or "Telephone" button located
on the steering wheel, as long as there is
no telephone call in progress.
Voice commands Help messages
Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover, say
"navigate to" and then the address or contact
name. For example, "navigate to address
11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to
contact, John Miller". You can specify if it's
a preferred or recent destination. For example,
"navigate to preferred address, Tennis club",
"navigate to recent destination, 11 Regent
Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate
home". To see points of interest on a map, you
can say things like "show hotels in Banbury"
or "show nearby petrol station". For more
information you can ask for "help with route
guidance".
Navigate to work
Navigate to preferred address <…>
Navigate to contact <…>
Navigate to address <…>
Show nearby POI <…>
Remaining distance To get information about your current route,
you can say "tell me the remaining time",
"distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help
with navigation" to learn more commands.
Remaining time
Arrival time
Stop route guidance
Depending on the country, give the
destination instructions (address) in the
language used by the system.
8
CITROËN Connect Nav
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice
command" or "Telephone" button located
on the steering wheel, as long as there is
no telephone call in progress.
Voice commands Help messages
Tune to channel <…> You can pick a radio station by saying "tune
to" and the station name or frequency. For
example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to
98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say
"tune to preset number". For example "tune to
preset number five".
What's playing To display the details of the current "track",
"artist" and "album", you can say "What's
playing".
Play song <…> Use the command "play" or "listen to" to select
the type of music you'd like to hear. You can
pick by "song", "artist", or "album". Just say
something like "play artist, Madonna", "play
song, Hey Jude", or "play album, Thriller".
Play artist <…>
Play album <…>
Media voice commands are available only
for a USB connection.
"Radio Media" voice
commands
9
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
"Telephone" voice
commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
these voice commands can be issued
from any main screen page after pressing
the "Telephone" button on the steering
wheel, as long as there is no telephone
call in progress.
If there is no telephone connected by
Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
"Please first connect a telephone", and the
voice session will be closed.
Voice commands Help messages
Call contact <…>* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
the contact name, for example: "Call David
Miller". You can also include the phone type, for
example: "Call David Miller at home". To make
a call by number, say "dial" followed by the
phone number, for example, "Dial 07776 835
417". You can check your voicemail by saying
"call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick
message to", followed by the contact, and then
the name of the quick message you'd like to
send. For example, "send quick message to
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of
calls, say "display calls". For more information
on SMS, you can say "help with texting".
Dial <…>*
Display contacts*
Display calls*
Call (message box| voicemail)*
* This function is available only if the
telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
10
CITROËN Connect Nav
If a telephone is connected to the system,
these voice commands can be issued
from any main screen page after pressing
the "Telephone" button on the steering
wheel, as long as there is no telephone
call in progress.
If there is no telephone connected by
Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
"Please first connect a telephone", and the
voice session will be closed.
Voice commands Help messages
Send text to <…> To hear your messages, you can say "listen to
most recent message". When you want to send
a text, there's a set of quick messages ready
for you to use. Just use the quick message
name and say something like "send quick
message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the
phone menu for the names of the supported
messages.
Please say "call" or "send quick message to",
and then select a line from the list. To move
around a list shown on the display, you can
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
"previous page". To undo your selection, say
"undo". To cancel the current action and start
again, say "cancel".
Listen to most recent message*
The system only sends pre-recorded
"Quick messages".
"Text message" voice
commands
* This function is available only if the
telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
11
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Navigation
Choice of a destination
To a new destination
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Enter address".
Select the "Country".
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the
"Number" and confirm by pressing
on the suggestions displayed.
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
criteria".
And/Or
Select "See on map" to select the
"Guidance criteria".
Press "OK" to start navigation.
Zoom out/zoom in using the touch buttons
or with two fingers on the screen.
In order to be able to use the navigation,
it is necessary to fill in the "City", the
"Street" and the "Number" on the
virtual keyboard or take it from the list in
"Contact" or in the "History" of addresses.
Without confirmation of the street number,
you will be guided to one end of the street.
To a recent destination
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Recent" tab.
Select the address chosen in the list to display
the "Guidance criteria".
Press "OK" to start navigation.
Select "Position" to visualise the arrival
point geographically.
To "My home" or "My work"
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Preferred" tab.
Select "My home".
Or
Select "My work".
Or
Select a preset favourite destination.
12
CITROËN Connect Nav
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Contact" tab.
Select a contact in the list to start navigation.
Towards points of interest
(POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
categories.
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Points of interest".
Select the "Travel", or "Leisure"
or "Commercial" or "Public" or
"Geographic" tab.
Or
Select "Search" to enter the name
and address of a POI.
Press "OK" to start calculation of
the route.
To a point on the map
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen.
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
Tap the screen to place a marker
and display the sub-menu.
Towards a contact
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press this button to start navigation.
Or
Press this button to save the
address displayed.
A long press on an item opens a list of
POIs nearby.
Towards GPS coordinates
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen.
Press this button to display the world
map.
Using the grid, select by zoom the
desired country or region.
Press this button to enter the GPS
coordinates.
13
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
A marker is displayed in the middle
of the screen, with the "Latitude"
and "Longitude" coordinates.
Press this button to start navigation.
Or
Press this button to save the
address displayed.
OR
Press this button to enter the value
for "Latitude" using the virtual
keypad.
And
Press this button to enter the value
for "Longitude" using the virtual
keypad.
TMC (Traffic Message
Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages are linked to a European
standard on the broadcasting of traffic
information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in
real time.
The TMC information is then displayed
on a GPS Navigation system map and
taken into account straight away during
navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic
jams and closed roads.
The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to
the service.
Connected navigation
Depending on version
Depending on the equipment level of the
vehicle
Network connection provided by
the vehicle
OR
Network connection provided by
the user
Connected navigation
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
For access to connected navigation, you
can use the connection provided by the
vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance
call" services or use your smartphone as
a modem.
Activate and enter settings for sharing
the smartphone connection.
14
CITROËN Connect Nav
Network connection provided by
the user
Connect a USB cable.
The smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Bluetooth connection
Wi-Fi connection
Restrictions of use:
- With CarPlay
®
, connection sharing is
only with a Wi-Fi connection.
- With MirrorLink
TM
, connection sharing
is only with a USB connection.
The quality of services depends on the
quality of the network connection.
Network connection provided by
the vehicle
The system is automatically
connected to the modem included
for the "Emergency or assistance
calls" services and does not require
a connection provided by the user
via their smartphone.
With the arrival of "TOMTOM
TRAFFIC", the services are
available.
The services offered with connected
navigation are as follows.
A Connected Services pack:
- Weather,
- Filling stations,
- Car park,
- Traffic,
- POI local search.
A Danger zone pack (option).
The processes and standards
are constantly changing; for the
communication process between the
smartphone and the system to work
correctly, we recommend that you
update the operating system of the
smartphone as well as the date and
time of the smartphone and the
system.
Settings specific to
connected navigation
In the "Settings" menu you can create
a profile for just one person or a group
of people with common points, with the
possibility of entering a multitude of
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
navigation history, contact favourites,
etc.); these settings are taken into account
automatically.
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
USB connection
Activate the Bluetooth function on
the telephone and ensure that it is
visible to all (see the "Applications"
section).
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the
system and connect to it (see the
"Applications" section).
15
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Settings".
Select "Map".
Activate or deactivate:
- "Allow declaration of danger
zones".
- "Guidance to final destination
on foot"
- "Authorise sending
information"
These settings must be made
according to each profile.
Select "Alerts".
Activate or deactivate "Warn of
danger zones".
Select this button.
Activate: Give an audible warning
For access to connected navigation, you
have to select the option: "Authorise
sending information".
The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to
the service.
Declaration of "Danger
zones"
To distribute information on the
declaration of danger zones, you should
check the option: "Allow declaration of
danger zones".
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "Declare a new danger
zone" button located in the upper
bar of the touch screen
Select the option "Type" to choose
the type of "danger zone".
Select the "Speed" option and enter
it using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save and distribute
the information.
"Danger zones" pack
updates
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "System settings".
Select the "System info" tab.
Select "View" to display the versions
of the different modules installed in
the system.
Select "Update(s) due".
You can download the system and map
updates from the Brand's website.
The update procedure can also be found
on the website.
16
CITROËN Connect Nav
Displaying the weather
or
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press this button to display the list of
services.
Select "View map".
Select "Weather".
Press this button to display primary
information.
Press this button to display the
detailed weather information.
The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will
be the maximum temperature for the day.
The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will
be the minimum temperature for the night.
Applications
Internet Browser
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet
Browser" function.
Press "Internet Browser" to display the
browser home page.
Select your country of residence.
Press "OK" to save and start the
browser.
Connection to the internet is via one of
the network connections provided by the
vehicle or the user.
Connectivity
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay
®
,
MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto functions.
Applications
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Applications" to display the
applications home page.
CarPlay
®
smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
17
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
The synchronisation of a personal
smartphone allows users to display
applications compatible with the
smartphone's CarPlay
®
technology on the
vehicle screen when the smartphone's
CarPlay
®
function has been previously
activated.
As the processes and standards are
constantly changing, it is recommended
that you keep your smartphone's
operating system updated.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
or
Press on "Telephone" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
Or
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
or
From the system, press
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay
®
function.
Press "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
On connecting the USB cable, the
CarPlay
®
function deactivates the
system's Bluetooth
®
mode.
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a personal
smartphone allows users to display
applications adapted for the smartphone's
MirrorLink
TM
technology on the vehicle
screen.
The processes and standards
are constantly changing. For the
communication process between the
smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone be
unlocked; update the operating system
of the smartphone as well as the date
and time of the smartphone and the
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
As a safety measure, applications can
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
moving.
The MirrorLink
TM
function requires the
use of a compatible smartphone and
applications.
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth
®
be started on the
smartphone.
18
CITROËN Connect Nav
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
or
From the system, press
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLink
TM
function.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the MirrorLink
TM
function.
In the process, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
Once connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
to MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
your network.
Android Auto smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
Synchronising a personal smartphone
allows users to display applications
adapted for the smartphone's Android
Auto technology on the vehicle screen.
The processes and standards
are constantly changing. For the
communication process between the
smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone be
unlocked; update the operating system
of the smartphone as well as the date
and time of the smartphone and the
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
As a safety measure, applications can
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
moving.
The "Android Auto" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
or
From the system, press
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android
Auto" function.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
19
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Different audio sources remain accessible in
the margin of the Android Auto display, using
touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
In Android Auto mode, the function to
display the menus by pressing the screen
briefly with three fingers is deactivated.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
your network.
Bluetooth connection
®
As a safety measure and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio system must be carried out with the
vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the system name in the list of
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure is used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Procedure from the system
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function in your telephone.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Depending on the type of telephone, you
may be asked to accept or not the transfer
of your contacts and messages.
Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Mobile internet data".
20
CITROËN Connect Nav
The "Mobile internet data" profile
must be activated for connected
navigation (where the vehicle does not
have "Emergency and assistance call"
services), having first activated sharing of
this connection on your smartphone.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Wi-Fi connection
Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi.
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Wi-Fi network
connection".
Select the "Secured" or "Not
secured" or "Stored" tab.
Select a network.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the
"Password".
Press "OK" to start the connection.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of
the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the
system.
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Share Wi-Fi connection".
Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
And/Or
Select the "Settings" tab to change the name
of the system network and the password.
Press "OK" to confirm.
To protect against unauthorised access
and make your systems as secure as
possible, the use of a complex security
code or password is recommended.
Managing connections
or
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Manage connection".
With this function you can view the access
to connected services, the availability of
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
21
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Radio
Selecting a station
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press "Frequency".
Press one of the buttons for an
automatic search for radio stations.
Or
Move the cursor for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Or
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" in the
secondary page.
Press "Frequency".
Enter the values using the virtual
keypad.
First enter the units then click on the
decimals zone to enter the figures
after the decimal point.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Radio reception may be affected by the
use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
The external environment (hills, buildings,
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This is a normal effect of the way in
which radio waves are transmitted and
does not indicate any failure of the audio
equipment.
Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency.
(refer to the corresponding section)
Press "Presets".
Make a long press on one of the
buttons to preset the station.
Activating/Deactivating RDS
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
Activate/Deactivate "Station
follow".
Press "OK" to confirm.
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS
station may not be assured throughout the
entire country as radio stations do not cover
100% of the territory. This explains the loss
of reception of the station during a journey.
22
CITROËN Connect Nav
Displaying text information
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
Activate/Deactivate "Display radio
text".
Press "OK" to confirm.
Playing TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
gives priority to TA alert messages.
To operate, this function needs good
reception of a radio station that carries
this type of message. While traffic
information is being broadcast, the current
media is automatically interrupted so that
the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Select "Announcements".
Activate/Deactivate "Traffic
announcement".
Press "OK" to confirm.
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception.
The different "multiplex/ensemble"
services offer a choice of radio stations
arranged in alphabetical order.
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select the audio source.
Press "Band" to select the "DAB" waveband.
DAB-FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
"DAB-FM tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding FM analogue station (if
there is one).
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
23
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
Activate/Deactivate "Station
follow".
Press "OK".
If "DAB-FM tracking" is activated, there
is a difference of a few seconds when the
system switches to FM analogue radio
with sometimes a variation in volume.
Once the digital signal quality is restored,
the system automatically changes back
to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
not available on FM ("DAB-FM" option
greyed out), or "DAB-FM tracking" is not
activated, the sound will cut out while the
digital signal is too weak.
Media
USB port
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or
connect the USB device to the USB port using
a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter.
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
(depending on model/depending on equipment)
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
has been checked in the audio settings.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.)
to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not
supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
Operation of controls is via the portable device.
CD player
(depending on model/depending on equipment)
Insert the CD in the player.
24
CITROËN Connect Nav
Selecting the source
or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "Source".
Choose the source.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your smartphone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first
adjust the volume on your portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of your audio system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
telephone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the
telephone is considered to be a media
source.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of
the portable device connected (artists/
albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/
podcasts).
The default classification used is by
artists. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu then
select the desired classification (playlists
for example) and confirm to go down
through the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage
devices, BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via USB ports. The adapter cable
is not supplied.
Device management is done by the audio
system controls.
Other devices, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
depending on compatibility.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The audio equipment will only play audio files
with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
48 kHz.
25
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using special characters
(e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
display problems.
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device be used.
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard is always used on an individual disc,
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the system name in the list of
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure is used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Procedure from the system
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
Or
Select "Search".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function in your telephone.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Mobile internet data".
26
CITROËN Connect Nav
Activation of the profile; "Mobile internet
data" is obligatory for connected
navigation having first activated sharing of
this connection on your smartphone.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Depending on the type of telephone, you
may be asked to accept or not the transfer
of your contacts and messages.
Automatic reconnection
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again, it is
automatically recognised and within about
30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
the connection is established without any
action on your part (Bluetooth activated).
To modify the connection profile:
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press the "details" button.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check the instructions for your
telephone and with your service provider
for the services to which you have access.
The profiles compatible with the system
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it.
27
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Deleting a telephone
Select the basket at top right of the
screen to display a basket alongside
the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted PHONE button to accept
an incoming call.
And
Make a long press
on the steering mounted PHONE
button to reject the call.
Or
Select "End call".
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended
while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
controls.
Calling a new number
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted PHONE
button.
Select "Contact".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Select "Call".
Calling a recently used
number
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or
Make a long press
on the steering mounted button.
Select "Calls".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
28
CITROËN Connect Nav
It is always possible to make a call directly
from the telephone; as a safety measure,
first park the vehicle.
Managing contacts/entries
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Select "Contact".
Select "Create" to add a new
contact.
In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone
numbers for the contact.
In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for
the contact.
In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses
for the contact.
The "Email" function allows email
addresses to be entered for a contact, but
the system is not able to send emails.
Managing messages
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Messages" to display the list
of messages.
Select the "All" or "Sent" or
"Incoming" tab.
Select the detail of the message
chosen in one of the lists.
Press "Answer" to send a quick
message stored in the system.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Press " Play" to hear the message.
Access to "Messages" depends on the
compatibility of the smartphone and the
integral system.
Depending on the smartphone, access to
your messages or email may be slow.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used.
Check in the manual for your smartphone
and with your service provider for the
services available to you.
Managing quick messages
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Quick messages" to display
the list of messages.
29
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival"
or "Not available" or "Other" tab
with the possibility of creating new
messages.
Press "Create" to write a new
message.
Select the message chosen in one
of the lists.
Press "Transfer" to select the
addressee(s).
Press " Play" to start playing the
message.
Managing email
or
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Email" to display the list of
messages.
Select the "Incoming" or "Sent" or
"Not read" tab.
Select the message chosen in one of the lists.
Press " Play" to start playing the
message.
Access to "Email" depends on the
compatibility of the smartphone and the
integral system.
Settings
Audio settings
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience".
Or
"Position".
Or
"Sound".
Or
"Voice".
Or
"Ringtone".
Press "OK" to save the settings.
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys
©
system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the front and rear
speakers configuration.
The Ambience (6 optional ambiences)
and Bass, Medium and Treble audio
settings are different and independent for
each audio source.
Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
The settings for "Position" (All
passengers, Driver and Front only) are
common to all sources.
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
"Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary
input".
Onboard audio: Arkamys
©
Sound Staging
optimises the balance/distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment.
30
CITROËN Connect Nav
Profile settings
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of the
driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the vehicle stationary.
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Setting of the profiles".
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"
or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Press this button to add
a photograph to the profile.
Insert a USB memory stick containing
the photograph in the USB port.
Select the photograph.
Press "OK" to accept the transfer of
the photograph.
Press "OK" again to save the
settings.
The location for the photograph is
square; the system reshapes the original
photograph if in another format.
Press this button to initialise the
profile selected.
Initialisation of the profile selected
activates the English language by default.
Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the
"Audio settings" with it.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience".
Or
"Balance".
Or
"Sound".
Or
"Voice".
Or
"Ringtone".
Press "OK" to save the settings.
Modifying system settings
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Screen configuration".
Select "Animation".
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling".
Select "Brightness".
31
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of
the instrument panel.
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "System settings".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
fuel consumption and temperature.
Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial
settings.
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by default.
Select "System info" to display the versions of
the different modules installed in the system.
Select the language
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Languages" to change the
language.
Setting the date
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Setting the time-date".
Select "Date".
Press on this button to define the
date.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Select the display format of the date.
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS synchronisation" is
deactivated.
The change between winter and summer
time is done by changing the time zone.
Setting the time
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Setting the time-date".
Select "Time".
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
32
CITROËN Connect Nav
Press "OK" to confirm.
Press this button to define the time
zone.
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate
synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
Press "OK" to confirm.
The system does not automatically
manage the change between winter and
summer time (depending on country).
Colour schemes
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the colour scheme is only
possible when the vehicle is stationary.
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Select "Colour schemes".
Select a colour scheme in the list
then press "OK" to confirm.
Every time the colour scheme is changed,
the system restarts, temporarily displaying
a black screen.
Frequently asked questions
The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning your audio system.
33
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Navigation
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with
the current location (exclusion of toll roads on
a toll road).
Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of "Danger zones" does
not work.
The audible warning is not active or the volume
is too low.
Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation"
menu and check the voice volume in the audio
settings.
The system does not suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of
TMC messages.
Select the setting for the "Traffic info" function
in the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
Automatic).
I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on
my route.
When not navigating, the system announces all
"Danger zones" positioned in a cone located in
front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for
"Danger zones" located on nearby or parallel
roads.
Zoom in on the map to see the exact position
of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to
no longer receive alerts other than navigation
instructions or to reduce the time for the
announcement.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not
indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the
system begins to receive the traffic information.
Wait until the traffic information is being
received correctly (display of the traffic
information icons on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic
information.
This is perfectly normal. The system is
dependent on the traffic information available.
34
CITROËN Connect Nav
Radio
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The reception quality of the tuned radio station
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed,
etc.).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of
the station or no transmitter is present in the
geographical area.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
basement car parks, etc.) block reception,
including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may
take up to 3 minutes to receive more than
4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely
so that there is GPS coverage by at least
4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment
(tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of
reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This behaviour is normal. The system is
dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical
areas, the connection may be unavailable.
Check that the connected services are
activated (settings, contract).
35
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
stations received.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or has changed its
name in the list.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations" secondary menu.
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick
may greatly slow down access to reading
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does
not contain audio files or contains audio files of
a format not recognised by the audio system.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is
not compatible with the player (udf, etc.).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system
not recognised by the audio system.
Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too badly damaged.
Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
The audio system CD does not read DVDs.
Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not
be read by the audio system.
Media
36
CITROËN Connect Nav
There is a long waiting period following the
insertion of a CD or connection of a USB
memory stick.
Upon insertion of a new media, the system
reads a certain amount of data (directory, title,
artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds
to a few minutes.
This is perfectly normal.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are
unsuitable.
Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
selecting an ambience.
Some information characters in the currently
playing media are not displayed correctly.
The audio system does not display some types
of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically
launch playback.
Start playback from the device.
Names of tracks and playing time are not
displayed on the audio streaming screen.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
transfer of this information.
37
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Telephone
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be
switched off or the telephone may not be
visible.
Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with
the system.
You can check the compatibility of your
telephone on the Brand's website (services).
The sound of the telephone connected in
Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
The sound depends on both the system and
the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the
telephone call.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are
synchronising the contacts on the SIM card,
the contacts on the telephone, or both. When
both synchronisations are selected, some
contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
order.
Some telephones offer display options.
Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the telephone directory display settings.
The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending
SMS text messages to the system.
38
CITROËN Connect Nav
Settings
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
When changing the setting of treble and bass,
the ambience setting is deselected.
When changing the ambience setting, the
treble and bass settings are reset.
The selection of an ambience setting imposes
the settings for treble and bass and vice versa.
Modify the treble and bass or ambience
settings to obtain the desired musical
ambience.
When changing the balance setting,
distribution is deselected.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes
the balance settings and vice versa.
Modify the balance setting or the distribution
setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
There is a difference in sound quality between
the different audio sources.
To allow for optimal listening quality, the
audio settings can be tailored to different
sound sources, which can generate audible
differences when changing source.
Check that the audio settings are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is recommended that
the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance)
be adjusted to the middle position, select the
"None" musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode
or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When the engine is off, the system switches off
after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
Start then vehicle's engine to increase the
charge of the battery.
The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available
if the synchronisation with the satellites is
deactivated.
Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting.
Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).
305
.
Alphabetical index
ABS ....................................................... 103-104
Accessories ..................................................101
Accessory position .......................................131
Access to the 3rd row .....................................65
Active Safety Brake................. 21, 165-166, 168
AdBlue
®
.................................8, 20, 28, 204-205
Additive, Diesel .......................................18, 202
Adjusting head restraints .......................... 59-60
Adjusting seats ...............................57-59, 62-64
Adjusting the air distribution ................72, 74-75
Adjusting the air flow ............................72, 74-75
Adjusting the date ...............................39, 18, 31
Adjusting the height and reach of
the steering wheel ........................................68
Adjusting the seat belt height .......................106
Adjusting the temperature ...................72-73, 75
Adjusting the time ...............................39, 17, 31
Advice on driving ...................................126-127
Airbags ............................... 22-23, 109, 111, 113
Airbags, curtain ...................................... 110-111
Airbags, front...................................110-111, 114
Airbags, lateral ....................................... 110-111
Air conditioning ...........................................6, 73
Air conditioning, automatic ..................71, 75-76
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic ............ 74
Air conditioning, manual ............................71-72
Air intake ............................................. 72, 75-76
Air vents ..........................................................70
Alarm .........................................................53-54
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ............ 103-104
Anti-pinch ........................................................89
Anti-theft/Immobiliser .....................................44
Apple CarPlay connection ........................12, 16
Armrest, front ............................................62, 79
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) ..................... 103-104
Assistance,
emergency braking ..................... 103-104, 168
Assistance call .......................................102-103
Audio streaming (Bluetooth) .......................9, 24
Cable, audio ................................................9, 23
Cable, Jack .................................................9, 23
Cap, fuel filler ................................................190
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................190
Cartridge, fragrance ..................................77-78
CD ......................................................... 9, 23-24
CD, MP3 ................................................ 9, 23-24
A B
C
Battery ...........................195, 202, 231, 233-234
Battery, charging ................................... 232-233
Battery, remote control .............................45-47
Black panel......................................................11
Black screen ...................................................11
Blanking screen (snow shield) .............. 193, 197
Blind, panoramic sunroof ................................89
Blinds, side ..........................................79-80, 84
Blind spot detection ................................24, 174
BlueHDi ..........................................28, 204, 236
Bluetooth (hands-free) ...................13-14, 25-26
Bluetooth (telephone) .....................13-15, 25-27
Bonnet ...........................................................198
Boot ............................................................47-48
Boot (fittings) ...................................................86
Boot (opening) ................................................. 40
Bottle holder .................................................... 79
Brake discs ............................................203-204
Brake lamps .......................................... 223-225
Brakes ............................................. 13, 203-204
Braking,
automatic emergency ........... 21, 165-166, 168
Braking, dynamic emergency ................131-134
Brightness .......................................................16
Bulbs (changing) ...........................220, 223-225
Central locking ....................................40, 42-43
Changing a bulb ............................ 220, 223-225
Changing a fuse ............................ 226-228, 230
Changing a wheel ..................................211-216
Changing a wiper blade ................100, 195-196
Changing the remote control battery ........46-47
Checking the engine oil level .......................... 27
Checking the levels ...............................199, 201
Checking tyre pressures
(using the kit) ...................................... 208-210
Checks .......................................... 199, 202-204
Checks, routine ..................................... 202-204
Child lock .......................................................124
Children ..................................118, 120-121, 123
Children (safety) ............................................ 124
Child seats ..............108, 112-113, 117-118, 124
Child seats, conventional ..............................117
Child seats, ISOFIX ....................... 119-121, 123
CITROËN Connect Nav ....................................1
CITROËN Connect Radio ................................. 1
Closing the boot .........................................47-48
Closing the doors ................................40, 42-43
Collision Risk Alert.................................165-167
Configuration, vehicle ....................31-33, 35-36
Configurations, seats ...................................... 67
Connection, Bluetooth ............. 13-15, 19, 25-27
Connection, MirrorLink ........................ 11-12, 17
Connection, Wi-Fi network .............................20
Control, back-up boot release ........................51
Control, back-up door release .................. 45-46
Control, heated seats ......................................61
Control stalk, lighting ................................90, 92
Control stalk, wipers .................................98-99
Courtesy lamps ......................................... 87-88
Cruise control ....................... 144, 146, 148-150,
157-161, 163, 165
Cruise control, adaptive
..................146, 151-154
156-157, 159
Cruise control, adaptive with Stop
function ................................146, 157-161, 163
306
Alphabetical index
H
Hands-free access .....................................51-52
Hands-free tailgate ................................... 50-52
Hazard warning lamps ...................101-102, 208
Hazard warning lamps,
automatic operation .................................... 102
Headlamp adjustment .....................................96
Headlamps, automatic dipping ...........25, 94-96
Headlamps, automatic illumination ..........90, 93
Headlamps, dipped beam .........25, 90, 220-221
Headlamps, directional ........................... 97, 220
Headlamps, halogen ..................................... 221
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
– Digital radio ............................................8, 22
Date (setting) ....................................... 39, 18, 31
Daytime running lamps ................... 93, 220-222
Deactivating the passenger airbag .110, 113-114
Deadlocking ...............................................41-42
Defrosting ........................................................77
Defrosting, front ..............................................77
Demisting ........................................................77
Demisting, front ............................................... 77
Demisting, rear ................................................ 68
Demisting, rear screen ...................................68
Dimensions ...................................................243
Dipstick ............................................ 27, 199-200
Direction indicators ......................... 92, 220-225
Display screen, instrument panel .................139
Doors ...............................................................47
Driver's attention warning ............................. 175
Driving economically.........................................6
Driving positions (storing) ...............................59
Dynamic stability control (DSC) .......21, 103-105
Eco-driving (advice) ..........................................6
Economy mode .............................................195
E
F
G
Fatigue detection ..........................................175
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank ................................205
Filling the fuel tank .................................189-191
Filter, air ........................................................202
Filter, oil .........................................................202
Filter, particle ........................................ 201-202
Filter, passenger compartment .....................202
Fitting a wheel ........................................217-219
Fitting roof bars .............................................196
Fittings, boot ...................................................86
Fittings, interior ...............................................79
Fittings, rear ....................................................84
Flap, fuel filler .........................................190-191
Floor, concertina ....................................... 65-66
Foglamp, rear ..................................24, 223-225
Foglamps ......................................................221
Foglamps, front ........... 91, 96-97, 220, 222, 225
Foglamps, rear ................................................ 91
Folding the rear seats ...............................62-66
Frequency (radio) .......................................21-22
Gauge, fuel....................................................190
Gearbox, automatic ...............134, 136-141, 203
Gearbox, manual ............134-135, 140-141, 203
Gear lever .........................................................6
Gear lever, manual gearbox .........................135
Gear efficiency indicator ............................... 139
Glove box .................................................. 79-80
G.P.S. ..............................................................12
Cruise control by speed limit recognition .....146
Cup holder .......................................................79
Fuel............................................................6, 189
Fuel consumption ..................................6, 38-39
Fuel tank........................................................191
Fusebox, dashboard .....................226-228, 230
Fusebox, engine compartment ..... 226-228, 230
Fuses .............................................226-228, 230
Electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) ................................................ 103-104
Electronic stability control (ESC) .......... 103-104
Emergency braking assistance (EBA)
... 103-104
Emergency call ......................................102-103
Emergency switching off .......................128, 130
Emissions control system, SCR ...................204
Energy economy mode ................................. 195
Engine, Diesel ................22, 189, 199, 236, 240
Engine, petrol ................................189, 199, 238
Engine compartment ....................................199
Engines ......................................... 237-238, 240
Environment ................................................6, 47
307
.
Alphabetical index
Maintenance, routine ........................................6
Map reading lamps .........................................88
Markings, identification .................................244
Massage function ...........................................60
Mat ............................................................82-83
Memorising a speed .....................................144
Menu ...............................................................12
Menus (audio) ........................................4-5, 3-5
Messages ........................................................ 28
Messages, quick .............................................28
Mirror, child surveillance ................................. 69
Mirror, rear view ..............................................69
Mirrors, door...............................68-69, 173-174
Misfuel prevention .........................................191
Modularity, seats ............................................. 67
Motorised tailgate ..................................... 48-51
Mountings, ISOFIX .......................................119
M
N
Net .............................................................86-87
Number plate lamps ......................................226
L
Labels, identification .....................................244
Lamps, parking ...............................................92
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) .........................................23, 169, 175
LEDs – Light-emitting diodes .......................220
Leg rest, electric .............................................60
Level, AdBlue
®
..............................................201
Level, brake fluid ........................................... 201
Level, Diesel additive ............................ 201-202
Level, engine coolant ..............................27, 201
Level, engine oil .............................. 27, 199-200
Level, headlamp wash ..................................201
Level, screenwash fluid ................................201
Levels and checks ................................199, 201
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs .......................220
Lighting ............................................................88
Lighting, ambient.............................................88
Lighting, directional ...................................96-97
Lighting, guide-me home ................................93
Lighting, interior ........................................ 87-88
Lighting, welcome ...........................................94
Loading .............................................................6
Load reduction mode ....................................195
Locating your vehicle ...................................... 41
Locking ......................................................44-45
Locking from the inside .............................43-44
I
Identification, vehicle ....................................244
Ignition .....................................................131, 28
Ignition on......................................................131
Immobiliser, electronic ............................45, 127
Indicator, AdBlue
®
range ................................. 28
Indicator, coolant temperature ........................ 27
Indicator, engine oil level ................................27
Indicators, direction ........................................92
Inflating tyres ................................................203
Inflating tyres (using the kit) ..................208-210
Instrument panels ......................................... 8-9
Intelligent Traction Control ............................104
Internet browser ..............................................16
ISOFIX ...................................................120-121
ISOFIX mountings.........................................119
Key ................................................ 40-42, 44-46
Key, electronic .....................................40-43, 45
Keyless Entry and Starting ......... 41-43, 45, 129
Key not recognised ...............................128, 130
Key with remote control ................................127
Kit, hands-free ...............................13-14, 25-26
Kit, temporary puncture repair .............. 208-210
K
J
Jack .............................................. 211-216, 9, 23
Jump starting ................................................231
Headlamps, main beam ............ 25, 90, 220-222
Headlamps, Xenon .......................................220
Headlamp wash ............................................100
Head restraints, front ................................ 59-60
Head restraints, rear .......................................63
Heating ........................................................6, 72
Hill start assist ........................................134-135
Hooks ..............................................................85
Horn...............................................................102
Locking the doors .....................................42-44
Low fuel level ................................................190
Lumbar ............................................................60
308
Alphabetical index
Scented air freshener ................................77-78
Screen, cold climate .....................................197
Screen menu map ...........................................12
Screenwash, front .........................................100
Screenwash, rear ............................................ 99
Seat belts .................................15, 106-108, 117
Seats, electric ...........................................58-59
Seats, front ................................................ 57-59
Seats, heated .................................................. 61
Seats, rear .................................................62-66
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) ............204
Selector, gear .........................................136-139
Serial number, vehicle ..................................244
Service (warning lamp) ...................................17
Service indicator .............................................26
Servicing .........................................................26
Settings, equipment .......................31-33, 35-36
Settings, system ........................................16, 30
Sidelamps .................................90, 92, 220-225
Side repeater ................................................222
Snow chains ........................................... 191-192
Socket, 12 V accessory ......................79, 81, 85
Socket, 230 V ..................................................81
Socket, auxiliary ..........................................9, 23
Socket, Jack ..........................................82, 9, 23
Sockets, audio ................................................82
Speed limiter ..................................144, 146-148
Speed limit recognition ..........................144-145
Spotlamps, door mirror ...................................94
Starting a Diesel engine ...............................189
Starting the vehicle ............... 14-17, 21, 126-130
Starting using another battery .............. 130, 231
Station, radio ..........................................6, 21-22
Stay, bonnet ..................................................198
Steering mounted controls, audio ................3, 3
Steering wheel, adjustment ............................68
STOP (warning lamp) ......................................13
Stopping the vehicle .............14-17, 21, 126-130
Stop & Start .............................23-24, 39, 71, 77,
140-141, 190, 198, 202, 234
R
Radio ................................................. 6, 9, 21, 24
Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Broadcasting – DAB) ................................8, 22
Range ........................................................38-39
Range, AdBlue ..........................................28-29
RDS ........................................................ 7, 21-22
Reading lamps, rear ........................................84
Rear screen, demisting ................................... 77
Recharging the battery ......................... 232-233
Recirculation, air ................................. 72, 75-76
Reduction of electrical load ..........................195
Regeneration of the particle filter .................202
Reinitialisation of the under-
inflation detection system ........................... 143
Reinitialising the remote control ............... 46-47
Remote control ..........................................40-45
Removing a wheel .................................217-219
Removing the mat .....................................82-83
Replacing bulbs ............................220, 223-225
Replacing fuses ............................226-228, 230
Replacing the air filter ...................................202
Replacing the oil filter ...................................202
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter ......................................202
Resetting the service indicator .................26-27
Resetting the trip recorder ........................30-31
Reversing camera .........................................178
Reversing lamp ..................................... 223-225
Roof bars .......................................................196
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ..........................236
S
Safety, children ......................110, 112-114, 118,
120-121, 123-124
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) .........202
O
Obstacle detection ........................................ 176
Oil, engine .............................................199-200
Oil change .............................................199-200
Oil consumption .................................... 199-200
Opening the bonnet ......................................198
Opening the boot ...........................40-41, 47-48
Opening the doors .................................... 41, 47
Opening the panoramic sunroof blind ............89
Pads, brake ........................................... 203-204
Paint colour code ..........................................244
Panoramic glass roof ......................................89
Parcel shelf, rear .......................................84-85
Park Assist .....................................181-182, 185
Parking brake ........................................ 203-204
Parking brake, electric ..........14-17, 21, 131-134
Parking sensors, audible and visual .............176
Parking sensors, front ................................... 177
Parking sensors, rear....................................177
Plates, identification......................................244
Player, Apple
®
...........................................10, 24
Player, MP3 CD ...............................................23
Player, USB ................................................. 9, 23
Port, USB ..............................................82, 9, 23
Pre-heater, Diesel ...........................................22
Pressures, tyres ....................203, 211, 219, 244
Pre-tensioning seat belts ..............................108
Priming the fuel system ................................236
Profiles ......................................................16, 30
Protecting children ................. 110, 112-114, 118,
120-121, 123-124
Puncture ................................................208-214
P
309
.
Alphabetical index
Tables of engines ..................................238, 240
Tables of fuses .............................. 226-228, 230
Tailgate .......................................................47-50
Tank, fuel ................................................190-191
Technical data .......................................238, 240
Telephone ......................................13-16, 25-29
Temperature, coolant ................................ 14, 27
Three flashes (direction indicators) ................92
Time (setting) ...................................... 39, 17, 31
TMC (Traffic info) ............................................13
Tools .......................................................211-216
Total distance recorder ............................. 30-31
Touch screen..........................31-33, 35-36, 1, 1
Towing device .......................................127, 192
Towed loads ..................................................237
Towing another vehicle ......................... 234-235
Traction control (ASR) .....................21, 103-105
Traffic information (TMC) ................................13
Trailer .................................................... 127, 192
Triangle, warning...........................................208
Trip computer ............................................ 36-39
Trip distance recorder ...............................30-31
Tyres ................................................. 6, 203, 244
Tyre under-inflation
detection ................................22, 142-143, 211
T
V
W
U
Ventilation ..............................................6, 70-71
Visibility ...........................................................77
Vision 360 ..............................................179-181
Voice commands .........................................5-10
Warning and indicator lamps ..................... 11-12
Warning lamp, airbag ................................ 22-23
Warning lamp, braking system .......................13
Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater .......22
Warning lamp, low fuel level ...........................23
Warning lamp, parking brake .......................... 14
Warning lamp, Service....................................17
Warning lamp, STOP ......................................13
Weights .........................................................237
Wheel, spare ..........................203, 211-216, 244
Window controls .............................................55
Wiper, rear.......................................................99
Wiper blades (changing) ...............100, 195-196
Under-inflation (detection) ............................142
Unlocking .................................................. 40-41
Unlocking, selective ........................................ 42
Unlocking from the inside .........................43-44
Unlocking the boot ..........................................40
Unlocking the doors .................................. 43-44
Updating the date ................................39, 18, 31
Updating the time ................................39, 17, 31
USB .......................................................9, 23-24
Storage ............................................................80
Storage boxes ........................................... 83-84
Storing driving positions .................................59
Sun visor ...................................................79-80
Sun visor flap ............................................79-80
Synchronising the remote control .............46-47
Wipers ................................................. 25, 98-99
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive ...............98-99
03-18
CONDUENT
4Dconcept
Xerox
Reproduction or translation of all or part of
this document is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application
of the provisions of the European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are
used in the manufacture of the products that it
sells.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
ANG. 18B78.0040
*18B78.0040*
